WO2023155586A1 - Sidelink channel access method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Sidelink channel access method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023155586A1
WO2023155586A1 PCT/CN2022/140463 CN2022140463W WO2023155586A1 WO 2023155586 A1 WO2023155586 A1 WO 2023155586A1 CN 2022140463 W CN2022140463 W CN 2022140463W WO 2023155586 A1 WO2023155586 A1 WO 2023155586A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time unit
sub
reference signal
received signal
signal strength
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/140463
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王碧钗
李雪茹
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210339478.1A external-priority patent/CN116684967A/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023155586A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023155586A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of wireless communications, and in particular, to a sidelink channel access method and a communications device.
  • S-U Sidelink in unlicensed spectrum
  • SL-U sidelink in unlicensed spectrum
  • UE user equipment
  • LBT listen before talk
  • the present application provides a sidelink channel access method and a communication device, which can improve resource utilization.
  • a sidelink channel access method is provided, and the method can be applied in an unlicensed spectrum communication process.
  • the subject of execution of the method may be the first UE, or may be a chip applied in the first UE.
  • the following description is made by taking the execution subject as an example of the first UE.
  • the method includes:
  • the first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit, the first UE detects the received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit, and the first UE detects the received signal strength according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and at least one The received signal strength of the sub-time unit determines that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit.
  • the relationship between at least one sub-time unit and the first time unit is as follows: all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are distributed in the first time unit; or, one or more sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit sub-time units are distributed in the first time unit; or, all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are distributed outside the first time unit.
  • the received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the communication system (same system) where the first UE is located, so as to eliminate interference to itself from other UEs in the same system.
  • the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can not only represent the interference to itself from other UEs in the same system, but also represent the interference to itself from communication devices in other communication systems.
  • the first UE considers both the received signal strength of the same system and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit to determine whether each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is occupied by a communication device in another communication system, Furthermore, it is determined whether it can perform transmission in the second time unit. In this way, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the channel before the second time unit, the first UE can occupy the channel with other UEs in the same system in a time-division multiplexing manner, thereby improving resource utilization.
  • the detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on at least one sub-time unit includes: detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on the first sub-time unit, and at least one sub-time unit includes the first sub-time unit
  • the first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal in the first time unit.
  • all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are located in the first time unit, and each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit may be the first sub-time unit.
  • the first UE detects the received signal strength in the first sub-time unit.
  • the first UE detecting the received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit includes: the first UE detecting the received signal strength on a second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit including the second sub-time
  • the second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
  • each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit may be a second sub-time unit. All sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit may be located in the first time unit; or, all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit may be located outside the first time unit.
  • the first UE detects the received signal strength in the second sub-time unit.
  • the detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on at least one sub-time unit includes: detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on the first sub-time unit, and at least one sub-time unit includes the first sub-time unit
  • the first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal in the first time unit.
  • the first UE detects received signal strength on a second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit includes the second sub-time unit, and the second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
  • At least one sub-time unit includes a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units.
  • the first sub-time units may be distributed within the first time unit, and the second sub-time units may be distributed within the first time unit or outside the first time unit.
  • the first UE detects received signal strength on the first sub-time unit and the second sub-time unit.
  • the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: the first UE according to the first sub-time unit The received signal strength of a reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, determine the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N1, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the first UE.
  • the channel access type adopted by the first UE is type (Type) 1 channel access.
  • the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: the first UE according to the first sub-time unit The received signal strength of a reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, determine the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N2, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N2 is a predefined positive integer.
  • the channel access type adopted by the first UE is type (Type) 2 channel access.
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the first strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the first strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state; wherein, A strength is a difference between the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit includes not only the received signal strength of the same system, but also the received signal strength of other communication systems (different systems) except the communication system where the first UE is located, the first reference signal is sent by other UEs of the same system, such as the second UE, and the received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the same system. Therefore, the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit is different from that of the first reference signal
  • the difference between the received signal strengths, that is, the first strength may represent the received signal strengths of the different systems, so that the first UE determines the busy state of the first sub-time unit based on the received signal strengths of the different systems.
  • the first UE can still use the Type1 channel access process or Type2 channel access A process of accessing a channel and performing transmission in a second time unit.
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the second strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state; where at least A sub-time unit further includes a second sub-time unit, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  • the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit includes the received signal strength of the different system and does not include the received signal strength of the same system
  • the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit can represent the different system signal strength, so that the first UE determines the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit based on the signal strength of the different system. Even if other UEs in the same system occupy the first time unit before the second time unit, it does not affect the determination of the busy state of the second sub-time unit by the first UE.
  • the first UE can still use the Type1 channel access procedure or the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel.
  • the transmission is performed on two time units.
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the second strength is less than the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second strength is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state; wherein, The received signal strength of a reference signal is greater than a second threshold, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  • the first UE may determine that the second UE sends information through the physical channel in the first time unit. Moreover, the receiving strength of the first reference signal is relatively high, and correspondingly, the distance between the first UE and the second UE is relatively short.
  • the resource sensing results of the first UE and the second UE are similar, and the first UE and the second UE may share a channel. For the first UE, the first UE may use the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel, and perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the busy state of the second sub-time unit since the busy state of the second sub-time unit is determined based on the second intensity, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the first time unit before the second time unit, they will not Influencing the first UE to determine the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit.
  • the first UE can still use the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel and perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal PSCCH DMRS, so as to send the first reference signal when sending the PSCCH.
  • PSCCH DMRS physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal
  • the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal PSSCH DMRS, so as to send the first reference signal when sending the PSSCH.
  • PSSCH DMRS physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal
  • the first reference signal includes a preconfigured sequence. That is to say, the sequence of the first reference signal is the sequence configured by the first UE during factory configuration. In this case, different UEs in the same system use the same sequence when sending reference signals.
  • the first reference signal includes a sequence of communication group configurations. That is to say, different UEs in the same communication group use the same sequence when sending reference signals.
  • the first reference signal includes a sequence of network device configurations. That is to say, the network device configures the reference signal sequence for the second UE, so that the second UE uses it when sending the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the first reference signal is located on the second symbol of the first time unit, and does not affect signal transmission on the automatic gain control AGC symbol.
  • the method further includes: the first UE receives a second reference signal from the second UE at the first time unit, where the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal On the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the first UE performs AGC according to the second reference signal, so that the first UE can accurately receive signals of other UEs.
  • the first reference signal is located at the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the second symbol of the first time unit may be used to transmit information carried by the physical channel, so as to improve resource utilization.
  • the first symbol of the first time unit carries the sequence of the first reference signal.
  • the first partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the first UE to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal, so that the first UE determines whether to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the second partial sequence of the first reference signal is used for the first UE to perform AGC, so that the first UE can accurately receive signals of other UEs.
  • the method before the first UE determines that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, the method further includes: The first UE determines the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold.
  • the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit, including: when the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the time unit of the third threshold When the number is less than the fourth threshold, the first UE determines to perform transmission in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • the first UE determines not to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first UE may The transmission is performed in the second time unit, so as to prevent different UEs of the same system from continuously occupying the channel, thereby improving the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully occupy the channel.
  • the time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold are continuous in the time domain. That is to say, other UEs in the same system continue to occupy the channel before the second time unit.
  • the fourth threshold is preconfigured. That is to say, the fourth threshold is a parameter configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory. In this case, when different UEs in the same system determine whether to transmit in the second time unit, the same threshold, that is, the fourth threshold, is used for judgment.
  • the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group. That is to say, different UEs in the same communication group use the same threshold, that is, the fourth threshold, to make judgments when determining whether to transmit in the second time unit.
  • the fourth threshold is configured by the network device. That is to say, the network device configures the fourth threshold for the first UE, so that the first UE uses it when determining whether to transmit in the second time unit.
  • the fourth threshold is determined based on the maximum channel occupation time COT of the second UE, where the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
  • the first UE can select a UE from the UEs that continue to occupy the channel as the second UE, and use the maximum COT of the second UE as the fourth threshold to determine whether the first UE is in the second time unit It is used during transmission to make the value of the fourth threshold more flexible.
  • the method further includes: the first UE receives first indication information from the second UE, where the first indication information indicates at least one of a maximum COT and a remaining COT of the second UE.
  • the first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit, including: the first UE according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, and the first indication information determine that the first UE transmits in a second time unit, wherein the second time unit belongs to a time unit in the remaining COT of the second UE, so as to limit the second time unit
  • the total duration of channel occupation by the first UE and the second UE prevents different UEs of the same system from continuously occupying the channel, thereby increasing the probability that communication devices of different systems successfully occupy the channel.
  • the method further includes: the first UE receives second indication information from the second UE, where the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the first UE before the second time unit, or , the second indication information instructs the first UE to share the COT of the second UE, so that the first UE accesses the channel based on the channel access type indicated by the second indication information.
  • the method further includes: the first UE sends a third reference signal on a third resource, where the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit and before the second time unit, and the third The reference signal is used to instruct the first UE to transmit in the second time unit, so as to prevent communication devices of different systems from preempting the second time unit, and also enable other UEs of the same system to measure the received signal strength of the same system, so as to prevent other UEs of the same system from The UE preempts the second time unit, or enables the same-system UE to distinguish between same-system interference and inter-system interference.
  • a communication device which may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or a chip that implements the functions of the first UE above; the communication device includes To realize the corresponding modules, units, or means (means) of the above method, the modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit, a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to detect received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit.
  • a processing unit configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in a second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • the receiving unit configured to detect received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit, includes: detecting received signal strength on a first sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit including the first sub-time unit , the first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal on the first time unit, and/or, the received signal strength is detected on the second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit includes the second sub-time unit , the second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: according to the first reference The received signal strength of the signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit determine the busy status of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to When N1, the sending unit is controlled to transmit in the second time unit, where N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the communication device.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: according to the first reference The received signal strength of the signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit determine the busy status of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to When N2, control the sending unit to transmit in the second time unit, where N2 is a predefined positive integer.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the first intensity is less than the first threshold, determine that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the first intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, determine that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein the first intensity is the first The difference between the received signal strength of a sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the second intensity is less than the first threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein at least one sub-time unit It also includes a second sub-time unit, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the second intensity is less than the sixth threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state, and when the second intensity is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein the first reference signal The received signal strength is greater than a second threshold, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  • the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal PSCCH DMRS, or, the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal PSSCH DMRS.
  • the first reference signal includes a preconfigured sequence, or the first reference signal includes a communication group configuration sequence, or the first reference signal includes a network device configuration sequence.
  • the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second reference signal from the second UE at the first time unit, where the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal is located at the first on the first symbol of a time unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to perform automatic gain control AGC according to the second reference signal.
  • the first reference signal is located at the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the first symbol of the first time unit carries the sequence of the first reference signal, where the first partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the processing unit to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal, the first A second partial sequence of reference signals is used by the processing unit for AGC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the reference signal received signal Number of time units with intensity greater than the third threshold.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold When the number of units is less than the fourth threshold, it is determined that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • the time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold are continuous in the time domain.
  • the fourth threshold is preconfigured, or the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fourth threshold is configured by the network device, or the fourth threshold is based on the maximum The channel occupancy time COT is determined, wherein the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive first indication information from the second UE, where the first indication information indicates at least one of a maximum COT and a remaining COT of the second UE.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit, including: according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and at least one sub-time unit The received signal strength of the sub-time unit and the first indication information determine that the sending unit transmits in a second time unit, where the second time unit belongs to a time unit in the remaining COT of the second UE.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive second indication information from the second UE, where the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the communication device before the second time unit, or, the second The indication information instructs the communication device to share the COT of the second UE.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a third reference signal on a third resource, where the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit and before the second time unit, and the third reference signal Used to instruct the communication device to transmit in the second time unit.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device performs any of the above-mentioned aspects or any of the aspects.
  • the method performed by the first UE in one possible design.
  • the communication device may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or a chip implementing the function of the first UE.
  • a communication device including: a processor; the processor is coupled with a memory, and is used to read and execute instructions in the memory, so that the communication device performs any or all of the above-mentioned aspects
  • the communications device may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or, or a chip that implements the function of the first UE.
  • a chip including a processing circuit and an input/output interface.
  • the input and output interface is used to communicate with modules other than the chip, for example, the chip may be a chip implementing the first UE function in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • the processing circuit is used to run computer programs or instructions to implement the method in the above first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer can execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned aspects.
  • a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in any one of the above aspects.
  • a circuit system in an eighth aspect, includes a processing circuit configured to execute the method according to any one of the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a resource selection scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5a is a schematic diagram of a channel access scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5b is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of a sidelink communication scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6b is a schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a sidelink channel access method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8a is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8b is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10a is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10b is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10c is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10d is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10e is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10f is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11a is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of a reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11c is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 15a is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second in the specification and drawings of the present application are used to distinguish different objects, or to distinguish different processes for the same object, rather than to describe a specific sequence of objects.
  • the terms “including” and “having” mentioned in the description of the present application and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion.
  • a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes other unlisted steps or units, or optionally also includes Other steps or elements inherent to the process, method, product or apparatus are included.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used as examples, illustrations or descriptions.
  • the embodiment of the present application may be applicable to a communication system between UEs, such as a vehicle to everything (V2X) communication system and a device to device (D2D) system.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • D2D device to device
  • a V2X communication system is taken as an example to describe the communication system to which the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the communication system includes at least two UEs, and the two UEs can directly communicate through a side link (sidelink, SL) (in Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, only Two UEs are shown).
  • the communication system further includes network equipment.
  • UEs can also communicate with network devices.
  • the V2X communication system can have the following communication scenarios: communication between vehicle to vehicle (V2V), communication between vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to application server (vehicle to network , V2N) communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian mobile terminal (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle to vehicle
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • V2N vehicle to application server
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian mobile terminal
  • UEs communicate directly through sidelinks (sidelinks, SLs), without a sending and receiving process of network equipment, and there is no uplink and downlink communication links.
  • the UE is mainly used for receiving or sending data. Specifically, it includes a device that provides voice to the user, or includes a device that provides data connectivity to the user, or includes a device that provides both voice and data connectivity to the user. Examples may include a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the UE can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (radio access network, RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • radio access network radio access network
  • the UE may include terminal equipment, wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, V2X terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/machine-type communication (machine-to-machine/machine -type communications, M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, remote station , access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • IoT internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber station
  • mobile station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • user agent user agent
  • user device user device
  • it may include mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket, hand-held, computer built-in mobile devices, and the like.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • cordless telephone cordless telephone
  • session initiation protocol session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • constrained devices such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities, etc.
  • it includes barcodes, radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, RFID), sensors, global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing devices.
  • the various UEs described above if located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, and the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called an on-board unit (OBU). .
  • OBU on-board unit
  • the UE may further include a relay.
  • a relay any one or more of the networks.
  • all those capable of performing data communication with network devices can be regarded as UEs.
  • the device for realizing the function of the UE may be a terminal device, or may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the UE.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the UE is used as an example for realizing the functions of the UE, and the introduction is made.
  • the network device involved in the embodiment of the present application is a device deployed on a radio access network to provide a wireless communication function.
  • a network device may refer to a device that communicates with a wireless terminal through one or more cells on the air interface of the access network, where the device that implements the function of the network device may be a network device, or it may be a device that supports the network device to implement the Functional device (such as a chip in a network device).
  • the network device can perform attribute management on the air interface.
  • Network devices may also coordinate attribute management for the air interface.
  • Network equipment includes various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay devices such as relay stations or chips of relay devices, transmission reception points (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved network nodes (evolved Node B, eNB), next-generation network node (g Node B, gNB), evolved Node B (ng evolved Node B, ng-eNB) connected to the next-generation core network, etc.
  • the network device can be a base band unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (RRU).
  • BBU base band unit
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • the network device can be a baseband pool (BBU pool) and RRU.
  • both UEs are in the same public land mobile network (public land mobile network) , PLMN) (such as PLMN1) coverage, as shown in Figure 1; second, only one UE is within the coverage of the PLMN (such as PLMN1), and the other UE is outside the coverage of the PLMN (ie, PLMN1), as shown in Figure 2 thirdly, the two UEs are outside the coverage of the PLMN (such as PLMN1), and there is no pre-configured cell identity in the area where the two UEs are located, as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the dotted ellipse areas in FIG. 1 , FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 all indicate the coverage of the PLMN1. Since the side link is used for communication between the two UEs, no matter whether the two UEs are within the coverage of the PLMN at the same time, they can communicate normally.
  • the communication systems shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 can be applied to long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) or advanced long term evolution (LTE Advanced, LTE-A) systems, and can also be applied to the fifth generation of mobile communications Technology (5th generation mobile networks, 5G) networks or other networks in the future, of course, can also be applied to LTE and 5G hybrid networking systems, or other systems, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE Advanced LTE Advanced
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communications Technology
  • 5G fifth generation mobile networks
  • the network devices and UEs in the communication system may correspond to different names, and those skilled in the art can understand that the names do not limit the devices themselves.
  • Received signal strength (received signal strength, Rss), received signal power, received signal energy
  • Received signal strength refers to the strength of the signal received by the communication device.
  • the received signal strength may be interpreted as received signal power, or the received signal strength may be interpreted as received signal energy.
  • E represents the energy of the received signal
  • t represents the time length of the received signal
  • P represents the power of the received signal.
  • received signal strength can also be described as received signal strength indicator (received signal strength indicator, RSSI).
  • RSSI received signal strength indicator
  • the received signal strength is used as an example to introduce, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to Here, if the implementation of received signal power or received signal strength is adopted, changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application shall be covered within the protection scope of this application.
  • Reference signals reference signals, RS
  • sequence of reference signals sequence
  • the reference signal is a known signal used by a communication device receiving the reference signal to perform channel estimation or channel detection or receive signal strength measurement.
  • the reference signal includes a channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS) or a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the reference signal may also have other names, such as a pilot signal.
  • the reference signal is used as an example for introduction.
  • a sequence of reference signals refers to a sequence of reference signals before they are mapped to time-frequency resources, and a sequence of reference signals may include one or more elements.
  • the SL resource pool can be understood as a collection of time-frequency resources, and is used for side link communication between UEs.
  • the SL resource pool also includes code domain resources.
  • the SL resource pool includes resources for sending and receiving information carried by physical channels.
  • the physical channel includes at least one of the following: physical sidelink control channel (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH), physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH), physical sidelink discovery channel (physical sidelink discovery channel, PSDCH) ), physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH) and physical sidelink broadcast channel (physical sidelink broadcast channel, PSBCH).
  • Sidelink control information can be carried in the PSCCH and sent; or, the SCI can be divided into two levels of SCI, wherein the first level of SCI is carried in the PSCCH, and the second level of SCI is carried in the PSSCH.
  • the PSSCH is used to carry data channel information, such as at least one of second-level SCI (2nd-stage SCI), data information, and side channel state information (channel state information, CSI) feedback information.
  • PSDCH is used to carry discovery messages.
  • PSFCH is used to carry sidelink feedback information.
  • the PSBCH is used to carry information related to sidelink synchronization.
  • the SL resource pool includes one or more time units in the time domain.
  • one time unit may be one or several symbols, one or several time slots (slot), one or several mini-slots (mini-slot), one or several subframes, or one or several frames.
  • a time slot is taken as an example to introduce a time unit.
  • multiple time units can be continuous or discrete in time.
  • the SL resource pool includes one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • a frequency domain unit may be one or several resource elements (resource element, RE), one or several resource blocks (resource block, RB), or one or several sub-channels (sub channel).
  • the size of the subchannel may be understood as that one subchannel includes one or more continuous (continuous) or interlaced (interlaced) RB quantities in the frequency domain.
  • one subchannel may include 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 or 50 RBs.
  • the name corresponding to the RB at the physical layer is recorded as a physical resource block (physical resource block, PRB).
  • resource selection mode 1 is also referred to as mode 1 for short
  • resource selection mode 2 is also referred to as mode 2 for short.
  • resource selection mode 1 and resource selection mode 2 are used as examples for introduction.
  • resource selection mode 1 the transmission resources of the UE are allocated by the network equipment, and the UE transmits information on the resources allocated by the network equipment.
  • the network device allocates a single transmission resource to the UE, and may also allocate periodic transmission resources to the UE.
  • the UE may determine transmission resources in a manner of sensing (sensing) + reservation (reservation), or select resources randomly, or allocate transmission resources by other UEs in the communication group.
  • sensing sensing
  • reservation reservation
  • Step 1 UE3 acquires data information to be sent.
  • UE3 has new data information arriving at or near time slot n, and needs to send data information to other UEs, trigger resource selection, that is, determine resources for data information transmission.
  • Step 2 UE3 determines a resource selection window.
  • the resource selection window is a preset duration after time slot n.
  • the start time slot of the resource selection window is marked as: n+T 1
  • the end time slot of the resource selection window is marked as: n+T 2 .
  • the value ranges of T1 and T2 can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 3 UE3 determines a sensing window.
  • the listening window is a preset duration before time slot n, such as 1000 time slots (or 1000 ⁇ 2 ⁇ time slots).
  • nT 0 the start time slot of the listening window
  • nT proc,0 the ending time slot of the listening window
  • the value ranges of T 0 and T proc,0 can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
  • UE3 may perform step 2 first and then step 3, or may perform step 3 first and then step 2, or may perform step 2 and step 3 simultaneously, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Step 4 UE3 determines reserved resources in the resource selection window according to the interception result of the interception window.
  • the listening result includes at least one of the following: the first-level SCI carried in the PSCCH, the measured value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of the PSCCH, and the measured value of the RSRP of the PSSCH corresponding to the PSCCH.
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • FIG. 4 the resources occupied by the PSCCH are shown in the squares filled with oblique lines in FIG. 4 .
  • the PSCCH includes the PSCCH sent by UE2, the PSCCH sent by UE1, and the PSCCH sent by UE4.
  • the resource reservation may be periodic or non-periodic.
  • the first-level SCI indicates that the UE sending the first-level SCI has reserved time-frequency resources required for subsequent transmission, as shown in the grid filled squares in FIG. 4 .
  • the reserved resources include the reserved resources of UE2, the reserved resources of UE1, and the reserved resources of UE4.
  • all the time-frequency resources within the resource selection window form a candidate resource set S_A, and the number of resources in the candidate resource set S_A is A.
  • UE3 will The reserved resource is excluded from the set of candidate resources S_A.
  • the RSRP measurement values of the PSCCHs sent by the above three UEs ie UE2, UE1 and UE4
  • UE3 will reserve resources of the above three UEs (ie UE2, UE1 and UE4) Excluded from candidate resource set S_A.
  • UE3 excludes the reserved resources from the set of candidate resources S_A.
  • the number of remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A is equal to B. If the remaining B resources in the candidate resource set S_A are less than X% of the total resources in the resource selection window, UE3 increases the above RSRP threshold, for example, by 3dB, until the remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A are greater than or equal to the total resources in the resource selection window X% of. Wherein, the value of X% is configured by the resource pool. Wherein, UE3 determines reserved resources from the remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A.
  • Step 5 UE3 sends data information on reserved resources.
  • reserving resources may be understood as that a certain UE (such as UE3) reserves some subsequent time-frequency resources.
  • the UE may send and receive data information on the reserved resource, or the UE may not use the reserved resource, that is, the reserved resource is not used by the UE.
  • reserving resources refers to resources that the UE needs to transmit signals.
  • the resource reservation may be understood as the transmission resource of the UE.
  • the same system refers to communication systems using the same radio access technology (RAT).
  • RAT radio access technology
  • Different systems refer to communication systems using different RATs.
  • the first UE is a UE in the sidelink communication system.
  • the same system refers to the sidelink in unlicensed spectrum (SL-U) system
  • the different system refers to the non-SL-U system, such as the new air interface Unlicensed spectrum (new radio in unlicensed spectrum, NR-U) system, wireless local area network (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system, etc.
  • SL-U sidelink in unlicensed spectrum
  • NR-U new air interface Unlicensed spectrum
  • WiFi wireless local area network
  • SL-U a communication system that performs SL communication in an unlicensed frequency spectrum
  • NR-U The communication system for 5G communication in unlicensed spectrum
  • the listen before talk (LBT) mechanism is commonly used to achieve fair competition for resources.
  • This mechanism requires communication devices to monitor the channel before using unlicensed spectrum resources to send data information, and perform idle channel assessment. (clear channel assessment, CCA) detection to ensure that the signal can only be transmitted when the channel is idle.
  • CCA central channel assessment
  • the UE detects that the channel is idle through the CCA, which may also be called LBT success.
  • the UE detects that the channel is busy through CCA, it may also be called LBT failure.
  • Type 1 (Type 1) channel access process
  • the UE When the UE performs the Type 1 channel access process, it needs to perform a random backoff (Backoff), that is, it needs to sense a random number of idle sensing slots (sensing slots) before sending a signal.
  • Backoff a random backoff
  • the UE Before sending a signal, the UE needs to determine that the sensing slots within a defer duration are all idle. Among them, the delay time satisfies:
  • T d represents the length of the delay time
  • T f represents the duration of the duration, such as 16us
  • T sl represents the duration of the sensing time slot, such as 9us
  • m p represents the number of sensing time slots
  • the value of m p is the same as that of the UE Related to business priorities. If all sensing slots within the delay time T d are idle, the UE enters a random backoff state.
  • the UE's initial random backoff counter is 3, it can only access the channel after sensing that all sensing time slots are idle for a delay time and then sensing that 3 sensing time slots are idle. for signal transmission. For example, after entering the random backoff state, the random backoff counter is decremented by 1 every time it senses that the sensing time is idle, until the random backoff counter is 0, the UE can access the channel and complete the LBT process.
  • the initial random backoff counter of the UE is 6, it enters the random backoff state after sensing that all sensing slots are idle for a delay time. After the UE perceives that a sensing time slot is idle, the value of the random backoff counter is reduced to 5. Afterwards, the UE perceives that the channel is busy. The UE needs to re-enter the random back-off state after sensing that all sensing slots are idle for a delay time. In this case, the random backoff counter is decremented from 5 by 1 until the random backoff counter is 0, the UE can access the channel and complete the LBT process.
  • the channel occupancy time (channel occupancy time, COT) should not exceed T mcot,p .
  • T mcot,p is a parameter related to the service priority of the UE.
  • the initiating device can share resources in the COT with one or more responding devices. These responding devices do not need to perform the Type 1 channel access process before accessing the channel, but only need to perform the Type 2 channel access process.
  • the initiating device may be a network device, and the responding device may be a UE served by the network device; or, the initiating device may be a UE, and the responding device may be a network device accessed by the UE.
  • the UE that has executed the above Type 1 channel access procedure may be referred to as an initiating device.
  • the Type 2 channel access process includes the Type 2A channel access process, Type 2B channel access process and Type 2C channel access process.
  • the sensing time should be greater than or equal to 25us; in the process of Type 2B channel access, the sensing time should be greater than or equal to 16us; in the process of Type 2C channel access, sensing is not required, but transmission The time should not exceed 584us.
  • Type 1 channel access process and Type 2 channel access process when the UE determines whether each sensing time slot is idle, energy measurement is performed with a granularity of 20MHz bandwidth. If the measured total energy does not exceed the first threshold, it may be considered that the sensing time slot is idle, otherwise it may be considered not idle.
  • the UE In the SL-U system, in order to meet the requirements of unlicensed spectrum regulations, the UE needs to perform LBT before accessing the channel. However, in the SL-U system, the UE can avoid the interference of other UEs in the same system by reserving resources, and LBT can also avoid the interference of other UEs in the same system and the interference of communication equipment in different systems. Interference, if the LBT mechanism in the NR-U system is directly used in the SL-U system, it may be that other UEs in the same system occupy the channel, resulting in LBT failure, unable to occupy adjacent time slots with other UEs in the same system, and the resource utilization rate is low. Low. Below, a detailed introduction will be made in conjunction with Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b:
  • Fig. 6a shows an information exchange process among UE1, UE2 and UE3.
  • the signal energy detected by UE3 is introduced as follows: the signal energy between UE1 and UE2 is less than the threshold, the signal energy between UE1 and UE3 is greater than the threshold, and the signal energy between UE2 and UE3 is greater than the threshold.
  • UE3 excludes the reserved resources of UE1 and UE2 through the resource selection mechanism, and the reserved resources finally determined by UE3 are shown in Figure 6b. That is to say, UE3 selects resources through a resource selection mechanism to avoid interference to itself by other UEs in the same system.
  • the reserved resources of UE3 are different from the reserved resources of UE1 and UE2.
  • the reserved resource of UE1 and the reserved resource of UE2 are earlier than the reserved resource of UE3.
  • the reserved resource of UE1 is adjacent to the reserved resource of UE3 in the time domain.
  • UE3 For UE3, UE3 performs the Type1 channel access process before its own resource reservation. For example, when performing the Type1 channel access process on the time slot where UE1's reserved resource is located, since UE1 performs data transmission in the previous time slot, UE3 Unable to perform random rollback, resulting in unusable reserved resources and low resource utilization.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a sidelink channel access method, and the sidelink channel access method in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system in FIG. 1 , FIG. 2 or FIG. 3 .
  • the first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit, and the first UE detects the received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit, The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit.
  • the received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the communication system where the first UE is located, so as to eliminate interference to itself from other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located.
  • the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can not only represent the interference of other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located, but also can represent the interference in other communication systems (which can be called different systems) except the communication system where the first UE is located.
  • the communication equipment interferes with itself.
  • the first UE not only takes into account the received signal strength of the communication system where it is located, but also takes into account the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit to determine whether at least one sub-time unit is occupied by a communication device in another communication system, and then determines that it can No to transmit on the second time unit. In this way, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the channel before the second time unit, the first UE can occupy the channel with other UEs in the same system in a time-division multiplexing manner, thereby improving resource utilization.
  • a sidelink channel access method 700 proposed in the embodiment of the present application is introduced in detail.
  • a time unit may include a certain number of symbols, time slots, subframes, frames, etc.
  • time slots are taken as an example to introduce the time unit.
  • a time unit may also have other names, such as a time domain unit.
  • the time unit is used as an example for introduction, and a unified description is given here, and details will not be described later.
  • a sub-time unit may include a certain number of sensing slots.
  • the sub-time unit is introduced by taking the sensing time slot as an example.
  • the second UE sends a first reference signal in a first time unit.
  • the first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit.
  • the first UE and the second UE belong to the same communication system, such as the SL-U communication system.
  • the first UE may be UE3, and the second UE may be UE1.
  • the first time unit is the first time slot.
  • the first reference signal please refer to the introduction of FIG. 11a, FIG. 11b, FIG. 11c, FIG. 12a, FIG. 12b and FIG.
  • the first UE detects received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit.
  • Each sub-time unit may include a sensing slot.
  • the first sub-time unit refers to the sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal on the first time unit, for example, the first sub-time unit is located in other symbols except the interval (gap, GAP) symbol in the first time unit , for example, the symbols between the second symbol and the thirteenth symbol in the first time unit.
  • the second sub-time unit refers to a sub-time unit that does not send signals to other UEs in the same system, for example, the second sub-time unit is located in the GAP symbol of the first time unit; or, the second sub-time unit is located in other time units ( In GAP symbols of other time units except the first time unit); or, the second sub-time unit is located in other symbols (or may be referred to as non-GAP symbols) of the first time unit except for the GAP symbols.
  • the non-GAP symbol where the second sub-time unit is located is recorded as the target symbol.
  • the target symbol satisfies the following condition: the second UE does not send a signal on the target symbol.
  • the first UE although the first UE can receive the first reference signal of the second UE, it does not receive the signal of the second UE on the target symbol of the first time unit.
  • each UE does not send a signal on the GAP symbol, and the GAP symbol can be used for the UE to perform transceiving conversion.
  • S702 includes S702a, but does not include S702b, as shown in the dotted box in Example 1 in Figure 9; or, S702 includes S702b, but does not include S702a , as shown in the dashed box of Example 2 in FIG. 9 ; or, S702 includes S702a and S702b , as shown in the dashed box of Example 3 in FIG. 9 .
  • the introduction of S702a and S702b is as follows:
  • the first UE detects received signal strength in the first sub-time unit.
  • the number of the first sub-time units may be one or more.
  • Each first sub-time unit may be a sensing time slot.
  • the first sub-time unit may be located in a non-GAP symbol of the first time unit. That is, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slots in the non-GAP symbols of the first time unit.
  • the first UE detects the received signal strength in the second sub-time unit.
  • the number of second sub-time units may be one or more.
  • Each second sub-time unit may be a sensing time slot.
  • the second sub-time unit may be located in the GAP symbol of the first time unit. That is, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slot in the GAP symbol of the first time unit.
  • the second sub-time unit may be located in the GAP symbols of other time units (time units other than the first time unit). That is to say, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slots in the GAP symbols of other time units (other time units than the first time unit).
  • the second sub-time unit may be located in the non-GAP symbol (such as the symbol with index a) of the first time unit, such as the above-mentioned target symbol. That is to say, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing time slot in the non-GAP symbol (such as the above-mentioned target symbol) of the first time unit.
  • the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT1 or LBT4.
  • the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT2.
  • the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT3.
  • the GAP symbol in the first time unit is taken as an example to introduce the first sub-time unit, the second sub-time unit and the LBT process, which should not be interpreted as implementing the present application.
  • the second sub-time unit may also be located in a non-GAP symbol.
  • At least one sub-time unit includes the sub-time unit perceived by the first UE after entering the random back-off state, or it can be understood that the first UE is in the The sub-time unit that needs to be perceived outside the delay time.
  • the total duration of all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit is equal to the perception duration of the first UE.
  • the first UE After the first UE determines the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, the first UE also performs S703:
  • the first UE determines whether transmission can be performed in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • the second time unit is after the first time unit of S701. Taking FIG. 8a as an example, the first UE is UE3, and the reserved resource of UE3 is in the second time slot. Correspondingly, the second time unit includes the second time slot. When the first time unit includes the first time slot, the second time unit follows the first time unit. In the embodiment of the present application, the first time unit and the second time unit may be continuous in the time domain, as shown in FIG. 8a , or may not be continuous.
  • the second time unit is after at least one sub-time unit in S702.
  • the first UE is still UE3, and the reserved resource of UE3 is in the second time slot.
  • the second time unit includes the second time slot.
  • the second time unit is after the at least one sub-time unit in S702.
  • Example 1 the implementation process of S703 is introduced through Example 1 and Example 2:
  • Example 1 as shown in the dotted box of Example 1 in FIG. 10a, S703 includes S7031 and S7032a, or, S703 includes S7031 and S7032b.
  • S7031, S7032a and S7032b are as follows:
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • At least one sub-time unit in S7031 is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S702, which will not be repeated here.
  • each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the first sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702a but does not include S702b, for each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the implementation of S7031 The process includes:
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of the first sub-time unit according to the first strength, where the first strength is a difference between the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the first intensity satisfies the following formula:
  • P3 represents the first strength
  • P2 represents the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit
  • P1 represents the received signal strength of the first reference signal
  • the busy state of the first sub-time unit is introduced as follows: if the first strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in the idle state; if the first strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE A UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state. Or, if the first strength is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; if the first strength is greater than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state.
  • the implementation process of S7031 includes: for at least one For each first sub-time unit in the sub-time unit, the first UE determines the busy state of the first sub-time unit according to the first strength, where the first strength is the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the first reference For the difference between the received signal strengths of the signals, refer to the introduction of formula (2) for details, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first UE determines the busy state of the second sub-time unit according to the second strength, where the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit, See the introduction of formula (3) for details.
  • the second intensity satisfies the following formula:
  • P3' represents the second strength
  • P2' represents the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit
  • the busy/idle state of the second sub-time unit is introduced as follows: if the second strength is less than the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in the idle state; if the second strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the second UE The second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state. Alternatively, if the second strength is less than or equal to the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; if the second strength is greater than the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state.
  • Example 1 for the first UE, after determining the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the first UE performs S7032a or S7032b:
  • the first UE transmits in the second time unit.
  • N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the first UE.
  • the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit can be understood as the idle sub-time perceived by the first UE after entering the random back-off state number of units.
  • N1 satisfies the following formula:
  • N1 N int formula (4)
  • N1 represents the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE after entering the random backoff state.
  • N int represents the initial value of the random backoff counter after the first UE enters the random backoff state.
  • the sub-time unit in the idle state may include the following three situations:
  • the sub-time units in the idle state are all the first sub-time units.
  • the sub-time units in the idle state are all the second sub-time units.
  • the sub-time units in the idle state include a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units.
  • At least one sub-time unit in S7032b is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S7032a, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first UE executes S7032a, it can be understood that the first UE accesses the channel according to the Type1 channel access procedure, so as to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • S703 includes S7031 and S7033a, or, S703 includes S7031 and S7033b.
  • the introduction of S7031, S7033a and S7033b is as follows:
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
  • each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the first sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702a but does not include S702b, for each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit the busy-idle status For determination, refer to the description of the formula (2), which will not be repeated here.
  • At least one sub-time unit includes both a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units, that is, when S702 includes both S702a and S702b, for at least one sub-time unit
  • For the determination of the busy state of the first sub-time unit refer to the description of formula (2)
  • for the determination of the busy state of the second sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit refer to the description of formula (3), where No longer.
  • each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the second sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702b but does not include S702a, for each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the implementation of S7031 The process includes:
  • the first UE determines the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit according to the second strength, where the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit, specifically Refer to the introduction of the formula (3).
  • the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit
  • the first UE may determine that the second UE sends information through the physical channel in the first time unit. Moreover, the receiving strength of the first reference signal is relatively high, and correspondingly, the distance between the first UE and the second UE is relatively short.
  • the resource sensing results of the first UE and the second UE are similar, and the first UE and the second UE may share a channel. For the first UE, the first UE may use the Type2 channel access procedure to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold are two different thresholds.
  • the value of the first threshold and the value of the second threshold may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first threshold is used for the first UE to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit.
  • the first UE uses the same value as the first threshold to judge the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit.
  • the value of the first threshold adopted by the first UE may be the same or different.
  • the first UE uses threshold 1 as the first threshold to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in the LBT1 process.
  • the first UE uses threshold 2 as the first threshold to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in the LBT2 process.
  • the threshold 1 and the threshold 2 both serve as the first threshold, and the values of the threshold 1 and the threshold 2 may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Example 2 for the first UE, after determining the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the first UE performs S7033a or S7033b:
  • the first UE transmits in the second time unit.
  • N2 is a predefined positive integer.
  • N2 indicates the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE during the Type2 channel access process.
  • N2 satisfies the following formula:
  • N2 represents the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE during the Type2 channel access process
  • T sl represents the duration of the sensing time slot
  • t represents the perception duration during the Type2 channel access process of the first UE
  • the sub-time units in the idle state may include the following situation: the sub-time units in the idle state are all the second sub-time units.
  • At least one sub-time unit in S7033b is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S7033a, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first UE executes S7033a, it can be understood that the first UE accesses the channel according to the Type2 channel access procedure, so as to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first UE may be indicated by the second UE which way the first UE uses to access the channel and perform signal transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first UE before performing S703, the first UE further performs S709:
  • the second UE sends second indication information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the second indication information from the second UE.
  • the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the first UE before the second time unit.
  • the channel access types include Type1 channel access and Type2 channel access.
  • the first UE determines the channel access type before the second time unit based on the channel access type indicated by the second indication information. For example, in the case that the channel access type is Type1 channel access, the first UE may adopt the introduction of Example 1 in S703. In the case that the channel access type is Type2 channel access, the first UE may adopt the introduction of Example 2 in S703.
  • S709 is an optional step.
  • the first UE When the first UE has determined the channel access type before the second time unit, if the network device is the first The UE configures the channel access type before the second time unit, and the first UE may not perform S709. Conversely, when the first UE has not determined the channel access type before the second time unit, the first UE may perform S709.
  • the second indication information indicates that the first UE shares the COT of the second UE.
  • the first UE determines that the channel access type before the second time unit is Type2 channel access.
  • the first UE determines that the channel access type before the second time unit is Type1 channel access, see the introduction of Example 1 in S703 for details.
  • the first UE may execute S701 first, and then execute S709, or execute S709 first, and then execute S701, or execute S701 and S709 at the same time, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. .
  • the implementation process of S703 is introduced through Example 3 and Example 4:
  • Example 3 as shown in the dotted box of Example 3 in Figure 10c, for the first UE, before the first UE performs S703, it also performs S708a:
  • the first UE determines the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold.
  • time unit in S708a is introduced as follows:
  • the time unit in S708a is before the second time unit, and the time unit in S708a may include the first time unit.
  • the second time unit is the x+2th time slot
  • the time unit in S708a may include the time slots before the x+2th time slot.
  • the time unit in S708a may include the x+1th time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include the x+1th time slot, the xth time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include the th x+1 time slot, xth time slot, x-1th time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include x+1th time slot, xth time slot, x-1th time slot slot, the x-2th slot.
  • the time unit in S708a may also include more time slots, which will not be described here one by one.
  • the reference signal in S708a may be sent by one UE, or may be sent by two or more UEs. Still taking Fig. 10d as an example, UE1 sends a reference signal in the x+1th time slot, and UE4 sends the reference signal in the xth time slot. When the time unit in S708a includes the x+1th time slot, the reference signal in S708a is sent by UE1. When the time unit in S708a includes the x+1th time slot and the xth time slot, the reference signal in S708a includes the reference signal sent by UE1 and the reference signal sent by UE4.
  • the third threshold may be an RSRP threshold, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • S703 includes S7034a:
  • the first UE determines whether the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can be Two time units are transmitted.
  • the process of determining whether the first UE can perform transmission in the second time unit can refer to the introduction of Example 1 and Example 2 in S703, which will not be repeated here.
  • the introduction of the fourth threshold is as follows:
  • the fourth threshold is preconfigured, or the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fourth threshold is configured by the network device.
  • the preconfigured fourth threshold may be understood as that the fourth threshold is a parameter configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory.
  • the communication system where the first UE is located such as the SL-U system
  • different UEs use the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a.
  • the communication system where the first UE is located further includes a second UE, a third UE, and a fourth UE. Since each UE is configured with the same parameters when leaving the factory, the above four UEs (such as the first UE, the second UE, the third UE, and the fourth UE) use the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a.
  • the fourth threshold configured by the communication group may be understood as the fourth threshold configured by the communication group where the first UE belongs.
  • a UE in the communication group sends indication information X to other UEs in the same communication group, where the indication information X indicates the magnitude of the fourth threshold.
  • the size of the fourth threshold can be determined based on the indication information X.
  • different UEs all adopt the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a.
  • the fourth threshold used by UEs in different communication groups when performing S7034a may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first UE and the second UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the first UE and the second UE belong is marked as communication group 1 .
  • the third UE and the fourth UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the third UE and the fourth UE belong is denoted as communication group 2 .
  • the fourth threshold used by the second UE when performing S7034a may be the same as or different from the fourth threshold used by the fourth UE when performing S7034a.
  • the fourth threshold configured by the network device.
  • the network device configures the fourth threshold for the first UE, so that the first UE can use it when performing S7034a.
  • the network device sends indication information Y to the first UE, where the indication information Y indicates the magnitude of the fourth threshold. After receiving the indication information Y, the first UE can determine the size of the fourth threshold based on the indication information Y.
  • the fourth threshold is determined based on the maximum COT of the second UE.
  • the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
  • the service priority of the UE can be reflected by the sequence of the reference signal, as shown in Table 1:
  • the second UE determines the sequence of the first reference signal based on its own service priority and Table 1.
  • the maximum COT of the UE can be equal to the total duration of 3 time units. Signal transmission is carried out in time units. If the service priority of the UE is service priority 2, the maximum COT of the UE can be equal to the total duration of 6 time units, correspondingly, the UE can perform signal transmission in a maximum of 6 consecutive time units.
  • the reference signal in S708a may be sent by one UE, or may be sent by two or more UEs, see the introduction of S708a for details.
  • the first UE may select one UE from the two or more UEs according to the first preset condition or the second preset condition as the second UE .
  • the first preset condition includes at least one of the following:
  • the preset condition a1 is that the COT of the second UE is greater than the COT of the third UE.
  • the third UE and the first UE belong to the same communication system.
  • the first UE may be UE3.
  • the second UE may be UE1, and the third UE may be UE4.
  • the second UE may be UE4, and the third UE may be UE1.
  • the first UE, the second UE and the third UE all belong to UEs in the SL-U system.
  • the COT in the preset condition a1 can be replaced by the maximum COT.
  • the preset condition a1 is replaced with the preset condition a11, that is, the maximum COT of the second UE is greater than the maximum COT of the third UE.
  • the reference signal in S708a is sent by two or more UEs, and the maximum COTs of different UEs may be the same or different.
  • the preset condition a11 means that the first UE uses the maximum COT as a selection criterion, and selects a UE with a larger maximum COT from multiple UEs as the second UE. Exemplary, as shown in Table 2:
  • the maximum COT of UE1 is equal to the total duration of 6 time units, and the maximum COT of UE4 is equal to the total duration of 3 time units. In this case, the first UE Use UE1 as the second UE.
  • the COT in the preset condition a1 can also be replaced with the remaining COT.
  • the preset condition a1 is replaced with the preset condition a12, that is, the remaining COT of the second UE is greater than the remaining COT of the third UE.
  • the reference signal in S708a is sent by two or more UEs, and the remaining COTs of different UEs may be the same or different.
  • the preset condition a12 it means that the first UE uses the remaining COT as a selection criterion, and selects a UE with a larger remaining COT from multiple UEs as the second UE.
  • the remaining COT of UE1 is equal to the duration of 1 time unit
  • the remaining COT of UE4 is equal to the duration of 2 time units.
  • the first UE A UE uses UE4 as the second UE.
  • the preset condition a2 is that the service priority of the second UE is lower than the service priority of the first UE.
  • the first UE can learn its own service priority.
  • the first UE can determine the service priority of the UE based on the above Table 1 and the reference signal in S708a. For example, still taking Table 2 as an example, when the service priorities of UE1 and UE4 are both lower than the service priority of the first UE, the first UE can combine the preset condition a1 to select a UE from UE1 and UE4 as Second UE.
  • the first UE may use UE1 as the second UE.
  • the service priority of UE4 is lower than that of the first UE and the service priority of UE1 is higher than that of the first UE, the first UE may use UE4 as the second UE.
  • the first preset condition may include the preset condition a1, but not include the preset condition a2.
  • the first UE selects the second UE by using the COT as a selection criterion.
  • the first preset condition may also include a preset condition a1 and a preset condition a2.
  • the first UE selects the second UE based on COT and service priority as selection criteria.
  • the first preset condition may not include the preset condition a1, but include the preset condition a2.
  • the first UE selects the second UE by using service priority as a selection criterion.
  • the second preset condition includes: the time unit in which the second UE sends the reference signal is continuous in the time domain with the second time unit.
  • the first UE may be UE3.
  • the second UE may be UE1, and the third UE may be UE4.
  • the second UE may be UE4, and the third UE may be UE1.
  • the first UE, the second UE and the third UE all belong to UEs in the SL-U system.
  • UE1 sends the reference signal in the xth time slot
  • UE4 sends the reference signal in the x-1th time slot. Therefore, the first UE uses UE1 as the second UE based on the second preset condition.
  • the COT of the first UE when the first UE determines to transmit in the second time unit, the COT of the first UE is introduced as follows: the COT of the first UE may be determined based on the fourth threshold. For example, the COT of the first UE satisfies the following formula:
  • COT1 represents the COT of the first UE
  • M represents the fourth threshold
  • N represents the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold
  • T s represents the duration of one time slot.
  • the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots.
  • the fourth threshold is M.
  • the second UE has occupied N time slots. It can be understood that the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is N.
  • the remaining (M-N) time slots are not occupied, it can be understood that the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is less than the fourth threshold.
  • the second time unit may be the N+1th time slot.
  • the first UE accesses The channel performs signal transmission on the N+1th time slot, and the duration that the first UE can continuously occupy the channel may be at most (M-N) time slots.
  • M the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold.
  • the second time unit may be the N+1th time slot.
  • the first UE does not perform signal transmission on the N+1 time slot, that is, the first UE does not access the channel, so as to improve the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully seize transmission resources.
  • the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is continuous in the time domain. It means that before the second time unit, other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located continuously occupy the transmission resources.
  • the COT represents the duration that the UE can occupy the channel.
  • the unit of COT can be us or ms or s, etc.
  • the COT of a certain UE can be equal to the total length of a certain number of continuous time slots, or a part of the time length of a certain time slot, or the sum of the total length of a certain number of continuous time slots and a part of the time length of a certain time slot .
  • “COT is equal to a certain number of continuous time slot durations” is used as an example for introduction, which should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Example 4 as shown in the dotted box of Example 4 in Figure 10c, for the first UE, before performing S703, the first UE also performs S708b:
  • the second UE sends the first indication information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first indication information from the second UE.
  • the first indication information indicates at least one of the maximum COT and the remaining COT of the second UE.
  • the first indication information indicates that the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of 6 time units, and/or, the first indication information indicates that the second UE The remaining COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of 1 time unit.
  • the first indication information may directly indicate the maximum COT of the second UE, or may indirectly indicate the maximum COT of the second UE, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first indication information may directly indicate the remaining COT of the second UE, or may indirectly indicate the remaining COT of the second UE, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • S703 includes S7034b:
  • the first UE determines whether transmission can be performed in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal, the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, and the first indication information.
  • the first UE may determine based on the number of first time units where the first reference signal is located, the position of the first time unit, and the maximum COT of the second UE Whether the second time unit is in the remaining COT of the second UE, if yes, the first UE performs the channel access procedure of example 1 or example 2, to determine whether signal transmission can be performed on the second time unit, if not, Then the first UE does not perform signal transmission in the second time unit.
  • the first UE may, based on the number of first time units where the first reference signal is located, the position of the first time unit, and the remaining COT of the second UE, Determine whether the second time unit can be in the remaining COT of the second UE, if yes, then the first UE performs the channel access process of example 1 or example 2, to determine whether signal transmission can be performed on the second time unit, if no , the first UE does not perform signal transmission in the second time unit.
  • the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots.
  • the second UE has occupied N time slots, which can be understood as that the number of first time units is N.
  • the remaining (M-N) time slots are not occupied, it can be understood that the remaining COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of the (M-N) time slots.
  • the second time unit may be the N+1th time slot, which belongs to one of the remaining (M-N) time slots of the second UE.
  • the first UE accesses The channel performs signal transmission on the N+1th time slot, and the duration that the first UE can continuously occupy the channel may be at most (M-N) time slots.
  • the second time unit may be the N+1th time slot, which does not belong to the remaining COT of the second UE.
  • the first UE A UE does not perform signal transmission on the N+1 time slot, that is, the first UE does not access the channel, so as to increase the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully seize transmission resources.
  • the first time unit carrying the first reference signal and the second time unit may or may not be adjacent in the time domain, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first reference signal includes one of the following:
  • the pre-configured sequence may refer to that the sequence is configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory.
  • the communication system where the first UE is located such as the SL-U system
  • different UEs use the same sequence when sending reference signals.
  • the communication system where the first UE is located further includes a second UE, a third UE, and a fourth UE. Since each UE is configured with the same parameters when leaving the factory, the above four UEs (such as the first UE, the second UE, the third UE, and the fourth UE) adopt the same sequence when sending reference signals.
  • the second item the sequence of communication group configurations.
  • the sequence of communication group configurations may refer to the sequence of communication group configurations where the first UE belongs.
  • a UE in the communication group sends indication information M to other UEs in the same communication group, where the indication information M indicates the sequence of the reference signal.
  • the sequence of the first reference signal can be determined based on the indication information M.
  • different UEs all use the same sequence when sending the reference signal.
  • the sequences used by UEs in different communication groups when sending reference signals may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first UE and the second UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the first UE and the second UE belong is marked as communication group 1 .
  • the third UE and the fourth UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the third UE and the fourth UE belong is denoted as communication group 2 .
  • the sequence used by the second UE when sending the reference signal may be the same as or different from the sequence used by the fourth UE when sending the reference signal.
  • the third item is the sequence of network device configuration.
  • the network device configures the sequence for the second UE, so that the second UE uses it when sending the first reference signal.
  • the network device sends indication information N to the first UE, where the indication information N indicates the sequence of the reference signal. After receiving the indication information N, the second UE can determine the sequence of the first reference signal based on the indication information N.
  • sequences in the above three items may include time domain sequences or frequency domain sequences, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first reference signal in S701 is introduced in detail through Example 1 and Example 2:
  • Example 1 the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the first symbol is an automatic gain control (AGC) symbol.
  • AGC automatic gain control
  • the first reference signal is located after the AGC symbol of the first time unit, such as the first symbol after the AGC symbol.
  • the sequence of the first reference signal may include a frequency domain sequence or a time domain sequence.
  • the first reference signal comprises a time domain sequence
  • the first reference signal occupies the full bandwidth.
  • the full bandwidth may be a 20 MHz bandwidth.
  • the first reference signal may occupy all sub-channels in the full bandwidth.
  • the first reference signal occupies the full bandwidth.
  • the subchannel occupied by the first reference signal is the same as the subchannel occupied by the physical channel.
  • the subchannel occupied by the physical channel is recorded as the first subchannel.
  • the first subchannel is a partial subchannel in the full bandwidth, for example, the first subchannel may be one or more subchannels.
  • Physical channels include at least one of PSSCH and PSCCH.
  • the PSSCH is taken as an example to introduce the first subchannel. Referring to Fig. 11b, the PSSCH occupies the jth subchannel.
  • the j-th sub-channel is the above-mentioned first sub-channel.
  • the PSSCH occupies N PRBs.
  • the first reference signal also occupies the jth subchannel.
  • the signal transmission strength of the second UE on each symbol may be the same. This means that the signal transmission strength on the AGC symbol is the same as the signal transmission strength of the first reference signal.
  • the second UE also performs S704:
  • the second UE sends the second reference signal in the first time unit.
  • the first UE receives the second reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit.
  • the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal is located on the first symbol of the first time unit. It can be understood that the first symbol transmission content of the first time unit is the same as the second symbol transmission content of the first time unit. Wherein, the second reference signal carried by the first symbol of the first time unit is used for the UE receiving the second reference signal to perform AGC.
  • the first UE performs AGC according to the received signal on the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the signal received by the first UE on the first symbol of the first time unit includes at least the second reference signal.
  • the signal received by the first UE in the first symbol of the first time unit also includes the signal sent by the third UE.
  • the first UE adjusts the amplification factor of its own receiver according to the received signal strength of the received signal of the first symbol of the first time unit, so as to ensure that it can correctly receive signals of other UEs.
  • Example 2 the first reference signal is located in the first symbol of the first time unit.
  • the first reference signal is located on the AGC symbols.
  • the sequence of the first reference signal may include a frequency domain sequence, or may include a time domain sequence.
  • the first symbol of the first time unit carries K repeated time domain sequences.
  • K is a positive integer, K ⁇ 2.
  • the first partial sequence in the K repeated time domain sequences is used for the first UE to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the second part of the K repeated time domain sequences is used for AGC by the first UE.
  • the first UE performs AGC according to the second part of the sequence to adjust the amplification factor of its own receiver, so as to ensure that it can correctly receive Signals from other UEs.
  • the first partial sequence is different from the second partial sequence.
  • the first partial sequence follows the second partial sequence.
  • the introduction of the first part sequence and the second part sequence is as follows:
  • the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, where K1 is a positive integer smaller than K.
  • the second partial sequence includes K2 time domain sequences among the K repeated time domain sequences, where K2 is a positive integer smaller than K.
  • the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, where K1 is a positive integer smaller than K.
  • the second partial sequence includes K2 time domain sequences among the K repeated time domain sequences, where K2 is a positive integer smaller than K.
  • the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences in the K repeated time-domain sequences, and a part of the sequence in the first time-domain sequence (or, described as, a part of elements in the first time-domain sequence), where , K1 is a positive integer less than K.
  • the second partial sequence includes K2 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, and another partial sequence (or, described as, another part of elements in the first time-domain sequence) of the first time-domain sequence. Wherein, K2 is a positive integer smaller than K.
  • the K repeated time-domain sequences include the aforementioned K1 time-domain sequences, K2 time-domain sequences and the first time-domain sequence.
  • the bandwidth of the first reference signal may refer to the introduction of the time-domain sequence in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • Example 2 when the first reference signal includes a frequency domain sequence, the first reference signal occupies 1 sub-frequency domain unit in every L sub-frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • the sub-frequency domain unit may be RE, PRB, sub-channel, etc.
  • the sub-frequency domain unit is RE as an example for introduction. That is to say, the second UE sends the first reference signal in a manner of L comb teeth in the frequency domain.
  • FIG. 12b shows a schematic diagram of resource mapping of 2 combs in the frequency domain.
  • two adjacent elements in the frequency domain sequence of the first reference signal are separated by 2 sub-frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
  • the time domain sequence of the first reference signal is obtained.
  • the time domain sequence of the first reference signal is two repeated time domain sequences, as shown in Fig. 12b.
  • the bandwidth of the first reference signal can refer to the introduction of the frequency-domain sequence in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second UE sends the signal strength of the first reference signal in one symbol, which satisfies the following formula:
  • P RS represents the transmitted signal strength of the first reference signal on a single symbol
  • P PS represents the transmitted signal strength of the information carried by the physical channel on a single symbol
  • X represents a multiple, X>0.
  • the value of X is 1, or the value of X is a value greater than 1.
  • Example 2 the second symbol in a time slot can be used to send information carried by the physical channel, so as to improve resource utilization.
  • the first UE may directly combine the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) with the locally stored first reference signal
  • the time-domain sequence performs a time-domain correlation operation to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal. If the sequence of the first reference signal is a sequence in the frequency domain, the first UE first transforms the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) from the time domain to the frequency domain. If the signal occupies all sub-channels, frequency-domain correlation operations are performed on all sub-channels to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal converted to the frequency domain occupies part of the sub-channels (such as the first sub-channel) , then perform a frequency domain correlation operation on the corresponding sub-channel to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • a frequency domain correlation operation on the corresponding sub-channel to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  • the received signal strength of the first reference signal refers to the received signal strength in the time domain.
  • the first UE transforms the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) from the time domain to the frequency domain, and after the frequency domain correlation operation, the calculated first reference signal
  • the received signal strength satisfies the following formula:
  • P1 represents the received signal strength of the first reference signal
  • P RS represents the transmitted signal strength of the first reference signal on a single symbol
  • X represents a multiple
  • X can refer to the introduction of formula (7), and will not be repeated here.
  • the first reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the first item PSCCH DMRS.
  • the PSCCH occupies 10 PRBs
  • the PSCCH occupies the second to fourth symbols of a time slot.
  • the PSCCH DMRS occupies part of the 10 PRBs.
  • PSSCH DMRS The second item, PSSCH DMRS.
  • the PSSCH occupies the full bandwidth
  • the PSSCH occupies the second to fourth symbols of a time slot, and the sixth to tenth symbols , the twelfth symbol to the thirteenth symbol.
  • PSCCH DMRS occupies the fifth symbol and the eleventh symbol of a slot.
  • FIG. 13 is an example of a configuration mode, which should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the UE in the communication system where the first UE is located sends a reference signal before sending the PSCCH. Based on this, the UE that receives the reference signal can also reduce the blind detection power consumption of its own PSCCH. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 14, taking the first UE as the UE receiving the reference signal as an example, the first UE also performs S706 and S707:
  • the third UE sends the third reference signal in the fourth time unit.
  • the first UE receives the third reference signal from the third UE in the fourth time unit.
  • the third UE and the first UE belong to the same communication system, such as the SL-U system.
  • the third UE and the second UE may be the same UE or different UEs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the fourth time unit refer to the introduction of the first time unit, which will not be repeated here.
  • the fourth time unit and the first time unit may be the same time unit, or may be different time units, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the third reference signal is the first reference signal.
  • the second time unit may belong to resources configured by the network device for the first UE.
  • the third reference signal is different from the first reference signal.
  • the second time unit may belong to the resource configured by the network device for the first UE, or, when the fourth time unit is before the second time unit, the second time unit may also be the resource configured by the first UE based on the fourth time unit.
  • the resources reserved by the PSCCH in the cell are selected for resource selection.
  • the first UE detects the PSCCH in a fourth time unit.
  • the fifth threshold may be pre-configured, or the fifth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fifth threshold is configured by the network device.
  • the fifth threshold includes an RSRP threshold.
  • the PSCCH is located after the third reference signal, and when the first UE detects that the received signal strength of the third reference signal is greater than the fifth threshold, the first UE continues to receive in the same time unit And detect PSCCH.
  • the first UE detects the PSCCH in the fourth time unit:
  • the first UE detects the PSCCH on all subchannels in the fourth time unit.
  • the first UE if the first UE receives the third reference signal in the fourth time unit, it means that within the fourth time unit, there is information transmission after the third reference signal.
  • the third UE transmits information through the PSCCH
  • the first UE can detect the PSCCH on all sub-channels of the fourth time unit. The blind detection range in the time domain is reduced, which helps to reduce the blind detection power consumption of the PSCCH.
  • Case 2 When the third reference signal occupies the first subchannel in the full bandwidth, the first UE detects the PSCCH on the first subchannel in the fourth time unit.
  • the first UE if the first UE receives the third reference signal on the first subchannel of the fourth time unit, it means that within the fourth time unit, after the third reference signal There is information transfer.
  • the third UE transmits information through the PSCCH on the first sub-channel
  • the first UE can detect the PSCCH on the first sub-channel in the fourth time unit, compared to blindly detecting the PSCCH on all sub-channels in all time units In other words, the blind detection range of the first UE in the time domain and the frequency domain is reduced, which helps to reduce the blind detection power consumption of the PSCCH.
  • the first UE After detecting the PSCCH, when the information carried by the PSCCH includes the first-level SCI, the first UE performs resource sensing based on the first-level SCI to determine reserved resources. See the introduction in Figure 4 for details. I won't repeat them here.
  • the information carried by the PSCCH includes the resource location information of the PSSCH
  • the first UE receives the information carried by the PSSCH based on the resource location information of the PSSCH, so as to realize the reception of data information.
  • the introduction of related technologies and will not repeat them here .
  • the first UE after the first UE performs S703, if signal transmission can be performed in the second time unit, the first UE further performs S710:
  • the first UE sends a fourth reference signal on the third resource.
  • the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit of S702 and before the second time unit, and the fourth reference signal is used to instruct the first UE to perform transmission in the second time unit.
  • the LBT process performed by the first UE includes LBT4.
  • the third resource may be one symbol preceding the GAP symbol in the first slot.
  • the first UE may send the fourth reference signal to occupy the channel in advance to avoid preemption by communication devices of different systems
  • the second time unit can also enable other UEs of the same system to measure the received signal strength of the same system, so as to prevent other UEs of the same system from preempting the second time unit, or enable UEs of the same system to distinguish between same-system interference and different-system interference.
  • indication information (such as the above-mentioned first indication information or second indication information) may be carried in the SCI to be sent through the PSCCH.
  • the indication information (such as the above first indication information or the second indication information) may be carried in the first-level SCI to be sent through the PSCCH.
  • the indication information (such as the first indication information or the second indication information) may be carried in the second-level SCI to be sent through the PSSCH.
  • the indication information (such as the above-mentioned first indication information, or the second indication information) may be carried in a media access control layer control element (media access control-control element, MAC CE), so as to pass the media access control layer (media access control, MAC) layer signaling.
  • a media access control layer control element media access control-control element, MAC CE
  • At least one sub-time unit in S702 includes the sub-time unit perceived after the first UE enters the random back-off state, or the first UE The number of sub-time units that the UE needs to perceive outside the deferment time. It should be understood that the first UE still needs to perceive a certain number of idle sub-time units within the delay time.
  • the determination of the busy state of such sub-time unit can refer to formula (2).
  • the determination of the busy state of such sub-time unit can refer to formula (3).
  • the sidelink channel access method is introduced. It should be understood that the number of the second UEs that send the first reference signal in the first time unit may also be at least two.
  • two UEs ie, UE1 and UE2 occupy transmission resources in a frequency division multiplexing manner.
  • the first time unit includes a first time slot
  • the second time unit includes a second time slot.
  • the first UE is UE3 in Fig. 8b
  • the second UE is UE1 and UE2 in Fig. 8b.
  • UE1 and UE2 occupy the first time unit in a frequency division multiplexing manner.
  • the number of second UEs is two.
  • each of the at least two second UEs sends the first reference signal in the first time unit.
  • the first UE receives the first reference signal from each of the at least two second UEs in the first time unit.
  • the received signal strength of the first reference signal determined by the first UE refers to the sum of the received signal strengths of the reference signals of each of the at least two second UEs.
  • the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit includes the interference of the communication device in the different system to itself , including interference from other UEs in the same system.
  • the self-interference of other UEs in the same system is determined based on the first reference signal of each second UE in the at least two second UEs.
  • the determination of the busy/idle status of the first sub-time unit can still refer to the introduction of formula (2). If the sub-time unit in which the first UE performs LBT includes the second sub-time unit, the determination of the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit can still refer to the introduction of formula (3).
  • FIG. 8b only uses frequency division multiplexing as an example for introduction, and should not be construed as a limitation to this embodiment of the present application. At least two second UEs may also occupy the same transmission resource in a space division multiplexing manner.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, and the communication device may be the network element in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the foregoing network element, or may be a component applicable to the network element.
  • the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1600 .
  • the communication device 1600 includes a processing unit 1601 , a sending unit 1602 and a receiving unit 1603 .
  • the processing unit 1601 is configured to support the first UE to perform S702 and S703 in FIG. Other processing operations.
  • the sending unit 1602 is configured to support other sending operations that need to be performed by the first UE in this embodiment of the application.
  • the receiving unit 1603 is configured to support the first UE to perform S702 in FIG. 7 and/or other receiving operations that need to be performed by the first UE in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1601 is configured to support other processing operations that need to be performed by the second UE in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the sending unit 1602 is configured to support the second UE to perform S701 in FIG. 7 , and/or other sending operations that the second UE needs to perform in this embodiment of the application.
  • the receiving unit 1603 is configured to support other receiving operations that need to be performed by the second UE in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1600 may further include a storage unit 1604 for storing program codes and data of the communication device, and the data may include but not limited to original data or intermediate data.
  • the processing unit 1601 may be a processor or a controller, such as a CPU, a general-purpose processor, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor can also be a combination of computing functions, for example, a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • the sending unit 1602 may be a communication interface, a transmitter, or a sending circuit, etc., where the communication interface is collectively referred to, and in specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces.
  • the receiving unit 1603 may be a communication interface, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc., where the communication interface is collectively referred to, and in specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces.
  • the sending unit 1602 and the receiving unit 1603 may be physically or logically implemented as the same unit.
  • the storage unit 1604 may be a memory.
  • the processing unit 1601 is a processor
  • the sending unit 1602 and the receiving unit 1603 are communication interfaces
  • the storage unit 1604 is a memory
  • the communication device involved in this embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the communication device 1700 includes: a processor 1701 , a communication interface 1702 , and a memory 1703 .
  • the communication device may further include a bus 1704 .
  • the communication interface 1702, the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 can be connected to each other through the bus 1704;
  • the bus 1704 can be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus etc.
  • the bus 1704 can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 17 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product carrying computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method described in the foregoing embodiments.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the method described in the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including: a processing circuit and a transceiver circuit, and the processing circuit and the transceiver circuit are used to implement the methods described in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processing circuit is used to execute the processing action in the corresponding method
  • the transceiver circuit is used to execute the receiving/sending action in the corresponding method.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device including a server, a data center, and the like integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state drive (solid state drive, SSD)) wait.
  • a magnetic medium for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape
  • an optical medium for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)
  • a semiconductor medium for example, a solid state drive (solid state drive, SSD)
  • the disclosed system, device and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple modules or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or modules may be in electrical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple devices. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a sidelink channel access method and a communication apparatus, relating to the technical field of wireless communications. The resource utilization rate of an unlicensed spectrum may be improved. The method comprises: a first user equipment (UE) receives, on a first time unit, a first reference signal from a second UE, the first UE detects the received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit, and according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, the first UE determines that the first UE performs transmission on a second time unit.

Description

侧行链路信道接入方法及通信装置Sidelink channel access method and communication device
本申请要求于2022年02月18日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210150296.X、发明名称为“一种SL-U信道接入方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,以及要求于2022年04月01日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210339478.1、申请名称为“侧行链路信道接入方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on February 18, 2022, with the application number 202210150296.X and the title of the invention "A Method for Accessing SL-U Channels", and claims that it will be filed in 2022 The priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202210339478.1 and the application name "sidelink channel access method and communication device" submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on April 01, the entire content of which is incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及无线通信领域,尤其涉及一种侧行链路信道接入方法及通信装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of wireless communications, and in particular, to a sidelink channel access method and a communications device.
背景技术Background technique
侧行链路非授权频谱(sidelink in unlicensed spectrum,SL-U)技术,是指将侧行链路(sidelink,SL)通信的频谱扩展至非授权频谱,以提升数据吞吐量。针对6GHz以下频段(sub-6GHz)的非授权频谱,用户设备(user equipment,UE)在接入信道前需执行先听后说(listen before talk,LBT)。Sidelink in unlicensed spectrum (SL-U) technology refers to extending the spectrum of sidelink (SL) communication to unlicensed spectrum to improve data throughput. For the unlicensed spectrum in the sub-6GHz frequency band (sub-6GHz), the user equipment (user equipment, UE) needs to perform listen before talk (LBT) before accessing the channel.
然而,在SL-U***中,若UE1的待接入信道之前,UE2通过信道进行信号传输,则容易导致UE1的LBT失败,UE1也就无法接入信道,资源利用率低。However, in the SL-U system, if UE2 performs signal transmission through the channel before UE1 accesses the channel, it is easy to cause UE1's LBT failure, UE1 cannot access the channel, and the resource utilization rate is low.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种侧行链路信道接入方法及通信装置,能够提高资源利用率。The present application provides a sidelink channel access method and a communication device, which can improve resource utilization.
为达到上述目的,本申请采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the above object, the application adopts the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供一种侧行链路信道接入方法,该方法可以应用于非授权频谱通信过程中。该方法的执行主体可以是第一UE,也可以是应用于第一UE中的芯片。下面以执行主体是第一UE为例进行描述。该方法包括:In a first aspect, a sidelink channel access method is provided, and the method can be applied in an unlicensed spectrum communication process. The subject of execution of the method may be the first UE, or may be a chip applied in the first UE. The following description is made by taking the execution subject as an example of the first UE. The method includes:
第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第一参考信号,第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。The first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit, the first UE detects the received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit, and the first UE detects the received signal strength according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and at least one The received signal strength of the sub-time unit determines that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit.
其中,至少一个子时间单元,与第一时间单元之间的关系如下:至少一个子时间单元中的全部子时间单元分布于第一时间单元中;或者,至少一个子时间单元中的一个或多个子时间单元分布于第一时间单元中;或者,至少一个子时间单元中的全部子时间单元分布于第一时间单元外。Wherein, the relationship between at least one sub-time unit and the first time unit is as follows: all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are distributed in the first time unit; or, one or more sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit sub-time units are distributed in the first time unit; or, all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are distributed outside the first time unit.
第一参考信号的接收信号强度表征了第一UE所在通信***(同***)的接收信号强度,以排除同***中其他UE对自身的干扰。至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,既能够表征同***中其他UE对自身的干扰,又能够表征其他通信***中的通信设备对自身的干扰。第一UE既兼顾了同***的接收信号强度,又兼顾了至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,来确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元,是否被其他通信***中的通信设备占用,进而确定自身能否在第二时间单元上进行传输。这样一来,即使同***的其他UE在第二时间单元之前占用信道,第一UE也能够与同***的其他UE采用时分复用方式占用信道,提高资源利用率。The received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the communication system (same system) where the first UE is located, so as to eliminate interference to itself from other UEs in the same system. The received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can not only represent the interference to itself from other UEs in the same system, but also represent the interference to itself from communication devices in other communication systems. The first UE considers both the received signal strength of the same system and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit to determine whether each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is occupied by a communication device in another communication system, Furthermore, it is determined whether it can perform transmission in the second time unit. In this way, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the channel before the second time unit, the first UE can occupy the channel with other UEs in the same system in a time-division multiplexing manner, thereby improving resource utilization.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,包括:第一UE在第一子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第一子时间单元,第一子时间单元为第二UE在第一时间单元上发送信号的子时间单元。In a possible design, the detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on at least one sub-time unit includes: detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on the first sub-time unit, and at least one sub-time unit includes the first sub-time unit The first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal in the first time unit.
也就是说,至少一个子时间单元中全部子时间单元位于第一时间单元中,至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元可以是第一子时间单元。第一UE在第一子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。That is to say, all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit are located in the first time unit, and each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit may be the first sub-time unit. The first UE detects the received signal strength in the first sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,包括:第一UE在第二子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第二子时间单元,第二子时间单元为第二UE未发送信号的子时间单元。In a possible design, the first UE detecting the received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit includes: the first UE detecting the received signal strength on a second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit including the second sub-time The second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
也就是说,至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元可以是第二子时间单元。至少一个子时间单元中全部子时间单元可以位于第一时间单元中;或者,至少一个子时间单元中全部子时间单元可以位于第一时间单元外。第一UE在第二子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。That is, each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit may be a second sub-time unit. All sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit may be located in the first time unit; or, all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit may be located outside the first time unit. The first UE detects the received signal strength in the second sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,包括:第一UE在第一子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第一子时间单元,第一子时间单元为第二UE在第一时间单元上发送信号的子时间单元。第一UE在第二子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第二子时间单元,第二子时间单元为第二UE未发送信号的子时间单元。In a possible design, the detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on at least one sub-time unit includes: detecting the received signal strength by the first UE on the first sub-time unit, and at least one sub-time unit includes the first sub-time unit The first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal in the first time unit. The first UE detects received signal strength on a second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit includes the second sub-time unit, and the second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
也就是说,至少一个子时间单元包括一定数量的第一子时间单元,以及一定数量的第二子时间单元。第一子时间单元可以分布于第一时间单元内,第二子时间单元可以分布于第一时间单元内,也可以分布于第一时间单元外。第一UE在第一子时间单元和第二子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。That is to say, at least one sub-time unit includes a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units. The first sub-time units may be distributed within the first time unit, and the second sub-time units may be distributed within the first time unit or outside the first time unit. The first UE detects received signal strength on the first sub-time unit and the second sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N1时,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,N1为第一UE随机生成的正整数。In a possible design, the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: the first UE according to the first sub-time unit The received signal strength of a reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, determine the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N1, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the first UE.
也就是说,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输之前,需要感知到空闲状态的子时间单元数量是随机的。例如,第一UE采用的信道接入类型是类型(Type)1信道接入。That is to say, before the first UE transmits in the second time unit, the number of sub-time units that need to perceive the idle state is random. For example, the channel access type adopted by the first UE is type (Type) 1 channel access.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N2时,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,N2为预定义的正整数。In a possible design, the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: the first UE according to the first sub-time unit The received signal strength of a reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, determine the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N2, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N2 is a predefined positive integer.
也就是说,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输之前,需要感知到空闲状态的子时间单元数量是确定的数值。例如,第一UE采用的信道接入类型是类型(Type)2信道接入。That is to say, before the first UE transmits in the second time unit, the number of sub-time units that need to perceive the idle state is a certain value. For example, the channel access type adopted by the first UE is type (Type) 2 channel access.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第一强度小于第一阈值时,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为空闲状态;当第一强度大于或等于第一阈值时,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为繁忙状态;其中,第一强度为第一子时间单元的 接收信号强度与第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值。In a possible design, the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the first strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the first strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state; wherein, A strength is a difference between the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
由于第一子时间单元的接收信号强度,既包括了同***的接收信号强度,又包括了除第一UE所在通信***之外的其他通信***(异***)的接收信号强度,第一参考信号是由同***的其他UE,如第二UE发送的,第一参考信号的接收信号强度,表征了同***的接收信号强度,所以,第一子时间单元的接收信号强度与第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值,即第一强度,可以表征异***的接收信号强度,以使第一UE基于异***的接收信号强度,来确定第一子时间单元的忙闲状态。即使同***其他UE在第二时间单元之前占用第一时间单元,也不影响第一UE确定第一子时间单元的忙闲状态,第一UE仍可以采用Type1信道接入过程或Type2信道接入过程,接入信道,在第二时间单元上进行传输。Since the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit includes not only the received signal strength of the same system, but also the received signal strength of other communication systems (different systems) except the communication system where the first UE is located, the first reference signal is sent by other UEs of the same system, such as the second UE, and the received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the same system. Therefore, the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit is different from that of the first reference signal The difference between the received signal strengths, that is, the first strength, may represent the received signal strengths of the different systems, so that the first UE determines the busy state of the first sub-time unit based on the received signal strengths of the different systems. Even if other UEs in the same system occupy the first time unit before the second time unit, it will not affect the first UE to determine the busy state of the first sub-time unit, and the first UE can still use the Type1 channel access process or Type2 channel access A process of accessing a channel and performing transmission in a second time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第二强度小于第一阈值时,第一UE确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态;当第二强度大于或等于第一阈值时,第一UE确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态;其中,至少一个子时间单元还包括第二子时间单元,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度。In a possible design, the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the second strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state; where at least A sub-time unit further includes a second sub-time unit, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
由于第二子时间单元的接收信号强度,包括了异***的接收信号强度,不包括同***的接收信号强度,所以,第二子时间单元的接收信号强度,即第二强度,可以表征异***的信号强度,以使第一UE基于异***的信号强度,来确定第二子时间单元的忙闲状态。即使同***其他UE在第二时间单元之前占用第一时间单元,也不影响第一UE确定第二子时间单元的忙闲状态。在空闲的第一子时间单元数量与空闲的第二子时间单元数量之和大于或等于N1时,第一UE仍可以采用Type1信道接入过程或Type2信道接入过程,接入信道,在第二时间单元上进行传输。Since the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit includes the received signal strength of the different system and does not include the received signal strength of the same system, the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit, that is, the second strength, can represent the different system signal strength, so that the first UE determines the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit based on the signal strength of the different system. Even if other UEs in the same system occupy the first time unit before the second time unit, it does not affect the determination of the busy state of the second sub-time unit by the first UE. When the sum of the number of idle first sub-time units and the number of idle second sub-time units is greater than or equal to N1, the first UE can still use the Type1 channel access procedure or the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel. The transmission is performed on two time units.
在一种可能的设计中,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第二强度小于第六阈值时,第一UE确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态;当第二强度大于或等于第六阈值时,第一UE确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态;其中,第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度。In a possible design, the first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when When the second strength is less than the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second strength is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state; wherein, The received signal strength of a reference signal is greater than a second threshold, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
在第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值时,第一UE可以确定第二UE在第一时间单元上通过物理信道发送信息。并且,第一参考信号的接收强度较高,相应的,第一UE与第二UE之间在距离上比较近。第一UE与第二UE的资源感知结果相近,第一UE与第二UE可以共享信道。对于第一UE来说,第一UE可以采用Type2信道接入过程接入信道,在第二时间单元上进行传输。When the received signal strength of the first reference signal is greater than the second threshold, the first UE may determine that the second UE sends information through the physical channel in the first time unit. Moreover, the receiving strength of the first reference signal is relatively high, and correspondingly, the distance between the first UE and the second UE is relatively short. The resource sensing results of the first UE and the second UE are similar, and the first UE and the second UE may share a channel. For the first UE, the first UE may use the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel, and perform transmission in the second time unit.
针对第二子时间单元的忙闲状态而言,由于第二子时间单元的忙闲状态是基于第二强度确定的,即使同***其他UE在第二时间单元之前占用第一时间单元,也不影响第一UE确定第二子时间单元的忙闲状态。在空闲的第二子时间单元数量之和大于或等于N2时,第一UE仍可以采用Type2信道接入过程,接入信道,在第二时间单元上进行传输。For the busy state of the second sub-time unit, since the busy state of the second sub-time unit is determined based on the second intensity, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the first time unit before the second time unit, they will not Influencing the first UE to determine the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit. When the sum of the number of idle second sub-time units is greater than or equal to N2, the first UE can still use the Type2 channel access procedure to access the channel and perform transmission in the second time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路控制信道解调参考信号PSCCH DMRS,以在发送PSCCH时发送第一参考信号。其中,PSCCH DMRS在一个时间单元中的配置方式可以参见相关技术,此处不再赘述。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal PSCCH DMRS, so as to send the first reference signal when sending the PSCCH. Wherein, the configuration manner of the PSCCH DMRS in a time unit can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路共享信道解调参考信号PSSCH  DMRS,以在发送PSSCH时发送第一参考信号。其中,PSSCH DMRS在一个时间单元中的配置方式可以参见相关技术,此处不再赘述。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal PSSCH DMRS, so as to send the first reference signal when sending the PSSCH. Wherein, the configuration method of the PSSCH DMRS in a time unit can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括预配置的序列。也就是说,第一参考信号的序列,是第一UE在出厂配置时配置的序列。此种情况下,同***的不同UE在发送参考信号时采用的序列相同。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a preconfigured sequence. That is to say, the sequence of the first reference signal is the sequence configured by the first UE during factory configuration. In this case, different UEs in the same system use the same sequence when sending reference signals.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括通信组配置的序列。也就是说,同一通信组的不同UE在发送参考信号时采用的序列相同。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a sequence of communication group configurations. That is to say, different UEs in the same communication group use the same sequence when sending reference signals.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括网络设备配置的序列。也就是说,网络设备为第二UE配置参考信号的序列,以使第二UE在发送第一参考信号时使用。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a sequence of network device configurations. That is to say, the network device configures the reference signal sequence for the second UE, so that the second UE uses it when sending the first reference signal.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号之后。例如,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第二个符号上,不影响自动增益控制AGC符号上的信号传输。In a possible design, the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit. For example, the first reference signal is located on the second symbol of the first time unit, and does not affect signal transmission on the automatic gain control AGC symbol.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第二参考信号,其中,第二参考信号与第一参考信号相同,第二参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号上。第一UE根据第二参考信号进行AGC,以使第一UE准确地接收其他UE的信号。In a possible design, the method further includes: the first UE receives a second reference signal from the second UE at the first time unit, where the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal On the first symbol of the first time unit. The first UE performs AGC according to the second reference signal, so that the first UE can accurately receive signals of other UEs.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号。此种情况下,第一时间单元的第二个符号可以用于传输物理信道所承载的信息,以提高资源利用率。In a possible design, the first reference signal is located at the first symbol of the first time unit. In this case, the second symbol of the first time unit may be used to transmit information carried by the physical channel, so as to improve resource utilization.
在一种可能的设计中,第一时间单元的第一个符号承载第一参考信号的序列。其中,第一参考信号的第一部分序列用于第一UE确定第一参考信号的接收信号强度,以使第一UE确定是否在第二时间单元上进行传输。其中,第一参考信号的第二部分序列用于第一UE进行AGC,以使第一UE准确地接收其他UE的信号。In a possible design, the first symbol of the first time unit carries the sequence of the first reference signal. Wherein, the first partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the first UE to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal, so that the first UE determines whether to perform transmission in the second time unit. Wherein, the second partial sequence of the first reference signal is used for the first UE to perform AGC, so that the first UE can accurately receive signals of other UEs.
在一种可能的设计中,在第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输之前,该方法还包括:第一UE确定参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量。第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:当参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量小于第四阈值时,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定在第二时间单元进行传输。In a possible design, before the first UE determines that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, the method further includes: The first UE determines the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold. According to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, the first UE determines that the first UE transmits in the second time unit, including: when the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the time unit of the third threshold When the number is less than the fourth threshold, the first UE determines to perform transmission in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
应理解,当参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量大于或等于第四阈值时,第一UE确定在第二时间单元不进行传输。It should be understood that when the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold, the first UE determines not to perform transmission in the second time unit.
在参考信号的接收信号强度大于第三阈值时,表征发送该参考信号的同***其他UE持续占用信道,在同***其他UE持续占用的时间单元数量小于第四阈值时,第一UE才有可能在第二时间单元上进行传输,以避免同***的不同UE持续占用信道,从而提高异***的通信设备成功抢占信道的可能性。When the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold, it means that other UEs in the same system that sent the reference signal continue to occupy the channel. When the number of time units continuously occupied by other UEs in the same system is less than the fourth threshold, the first UE may The transmission is performed in the second time unit, so as to prevent different UEs of the same system from continuously occupying the channel, thereby improving the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully occupy the channel.
在一种可能的设计中,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元在时域上是连续的。也就是说,同***其他UE在第二时间单元之前,持续占用信道。In a possible design, the time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold are continuous in the time domain. That is to say, other UEs in the same system continue to occupy the channel before the second time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第四阈值是预配置的。也就是说,第四阈值,是第一UE在出厂时配置的参数。此种情况下,同***中不同UE在确定是否在第二时间单元上进行传输时,采用同一阈值,即第四阈值,进行判断。In one possible design, the fourth threshold is preconfigured. That is to say, the fourth threshold is a parameter configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory. In this case, when different UEs in the same system determine whether to transmit in the second time unit, the same threshold, that is, the fourth threshold, is used for judgment.
在一种可能的设计中,第四阈值是通信组配置的。也就是说,同一通信组的不同UE在确定是否在第二时间单元上进行传输时,采用同一阈值,即第四阈值,进行判断。In a possible design, the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group. That is to say, different UEs in the same communication group use the same threshold, that is, the fourth threshold, to make judgments when determining whether to transmit in the second time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第四阈值是网络设备配置的。也就是说,网络设备为第一UE配置第四阈值,以使第一UE在确定是否在第二时间单元上进行传输时使用。In a possible design, the fourth threshold is configured by the network device. That is to say, the network device configures the fourth threshold for the first UE, so that the first UE uses it when determining whether to transmit in the second time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第四阈值是基于第二UE的最大信道占用时间COT确定的,其中,第二UE的最大COT与第二UE发送的第一参考信号相关联。In a possible design, the fourth threshold is determined based on the maximum channel occupation time COT of the second UE, where the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
也就是说,在第二时间单元之前,同***中持续占用信道的UE可以是一个或多个。此种情况下,第一UE可以从持续占用信道的UE中选择一个UE,作为第二UE,将第二UE的最大COT作为第四阈值,以在第一UE确定是否在第二时间单元上进行传输时使用,使得第四阈值的取值更灵活。That is to say, before the second time unit, there may be one or more UEs in the same system that continuously occupy the channel. In this case, the first UE can select a UE from the UEs that continue to occupy the channel as the second UE, and use the maximum COT of the second UE as the fourth threshold to determine whether the first UE is in the second time unit It is used during transmission to make the value of the fourth threshold more flexible.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:第一UE接收来自第二UE的第一指示信息,其中,第一指示信息指示第二UE的最大COT和剩余COT中的至少一项。第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,以及第一指示信息,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,第二时间单元属于第二UE的剩余COT中的一个时间单元,以限制第一UE和第二UE占用信道的总时长,避免同***的不同UE持续占用信道,从而提高异***的通信设备成功抢占信道的可能性。In a possible design, the method further includes: the first UE receives first indication information from the second UE, where the first indication information indicates at least one of a maximum COT and a remaining COT of the second UE. The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit, including: the first UE according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit. The received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, and the first indication information, determine that the first UE transmits in a second time unit, wherein the second time unit belongs to a time unit in the remaining COT of the second UE, so as to limit the second time unit The total duration of channel occupation by the first UE and the second UE prevents different UEs of the same system from continuously occupying the channel, thereby increasing the probability that communication devices of different systems successfully occupy the channel.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:第一UE接收来自第二UE的第二指示信息,其中,第二指示信息指示第一UE在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型,或者,第二指示信息指示第一UE共享第二UE的COT,以使第一UE基于第二指示信息指示的信道接入类型接入信道。In a possible design, the method further includes: the first UE receives second indication information from the second UE, where the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the first UE before the second time unit, or , the second indication information instructs the first UE to share the COT of the second UE, so that the first UE accesses the channel based on the channel access type indicated by the second indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:第一UE在第三资源上发送第三参考信号,其中,第三资源在至少一个子时间单元之后,且在第二时间单元之前,第三参考信号用于指示第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,以避免异***的通信设备抢占第二时间单元,也能够使得同***的其他UE测量同***的接收信号强度,避免同***的其他UE抢占第二时间单元,或者使得同***UE能够区分同***干扰和异***干扰。In a possible design, the method further includes: the first UE sends a third reference signal on a third resource, where the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit and before the second time unit, and the third The reference signal is used to instruct the first UE to transmit in the second time unit, so as to prevent communication devices of different systems from preempting the second time unit, and also enable other UEs of the same system to measure the received signal strength of the same system, so as to prevent other UEs of the same system from The UE preempts the second time unit, or enables the same-system UE to distinguish between same-system interference and inter-system interference.
第二方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中的第一UE,或者实现上述第一UE功能的芯片;所述通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a second aspect, a communication device is provided, which may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or a chip that implements the functions of the first UE above; the communication device includes To realize the corresponding modules, units, or means (means) of the above method, the modules, units, or means can be implemented by hardware, software, or by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.
该通信装置包括处理单元、发送单元和接收单元。其中,接收单元,用于在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第一参考信号。接收单元,还用于在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输。The communication device includes a processing unit, a sending unit and a receiving unit. Wherein, the receiving unit is configured to receive the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit. The receiving unit is further configured to detect received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit. A processing unit, configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in a second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,用于在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,包括:在第一子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第一子时间单元,第一子时间单元为第二UE在第一时间单元上发送信号的子时间单元,和/或,在第二子时间单 元上检测接收信号强度,至少一个子时间单元包括第二子时间单元,第二子时间单元为第二UE未发送信号的子时间单元。In a possible design, the receiving unit, configured to detect received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit, includes: detecting received signal strength on a first sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit including the first sub-time unit , the first sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal on the first time unit, and/or, the received signal strength is detected on the second sub-time unit, at least one sub-time unit includes the second sub-time unit , the second sub-time unit is a sub-time unit in which the second UE does not send a signal.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N1时,控制发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,N1为通信装置随机生成的正整数。In a possible design, the processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: according to the first reference The received signal strength of the signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit determine the busy status of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to When N1, the sending unit is controlled to transmit in the second time unit, where N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the communication device.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N2时,控制发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,N2为预定义的正整数。In a possible design, the processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: according to the first reference The received signal strength of the signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit determine the busy status of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit, when the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to When N2, control the sending unit to transmit in the second time unit, where N2 is a predefined positive integer.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第一强度小于第一阈值时,确定第一子时间单元为空闲状态,当第一强度大于或等于第一阈值时,确定第一子时间单元为繁忙状态,其中,第一强度为第一子时间单元的接收信号强度与第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值。In a possible design, the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the first intensity is less than the first threshold, determine that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the first intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, determine that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein the first intensity is the first The difference between the received signal strength of a sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第二强度小于第一阈值时,确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态,当第二强度大于或等于第一阈值时,确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态,其中,至少一个子时间单元还包括第二子时间单元,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度。In a possible design, the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the second intensity is less than the first threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; when the second intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein at least one sub-time unit It also includes a second sub-time unit, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:当第二强度小于第六阈值时,确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态,当第二强度大于或等于第六阈值时,确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态,其中,第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度。In a possible design, the processing unit is configured to determine the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including : When the second intensity is less than the sixth threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state, and when the second intensity is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold, determine that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state, wherein the first reference signal The received signal strength is greater than a second threshold, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路控制信道解调参考信号PSCCH DMRS,或者,第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路共享信道解调参考信号PSSCH DMRS。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal PSCCH DMRS, or, the first reference signal includes a physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal PSSCH DMRS.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号包括预配置的序列,或者,第一参考信号包括通信组配置的序列,或者,第一参考信号包括网络设备配置的序列。In a possible design, the first reference signal includes a preconfigured sequence, or the first reference signal includes a communication group configuration sequence, or the first reference signal includes a network device configuration sequence.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号之后。In a possible design, the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,还用于在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第二参考信号,其中,第二参考信号与第一参考信号相同,第二参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号上。处理单元,还用于根据第二参考信号进行自动增益控制AGC。In a possible design, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second reference signal from the second UE at the first time unit, where the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal is located at the first on the first symbol of a time unit. The processing unit is further configured to perform automatic gain control AGC according to the second reference signal.
在一种可能的设计中,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号。In a possible design, the first reference signal is located at the first symbol of the first time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,第一时间单元的第一个符号承载第一参考信号的序列,其中,第一参考信号的第一部分序列用于处理单元确定第一参考信号的接收信号强度,第一参考信号的第二部分序列用于处理单元进行AGC。In a possible design, the first symbol of the first time unit carries the sequence of the first reference signal, where the first partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the processing unit to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal, the first A second partial sequence of reference signals is used by the processing unit for AGC.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,在根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定在第二时间单元进行传输之前,还用于确定参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量。处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:当参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量小于第四阈值时,根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输。In a possible design, the processing unit is further configured to determine the reference signal received signal Number of time units with intensity greater than the third threshold. The processing unit is configured to determine that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, including: when the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold When the number of units is less than the fourth threshold, it is determined that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
在一种可能的设计中,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元在时域上是连续的。In a possible design, the time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold are continuous in the time domain.
在一种可能的设计中,第四阈值是预配置的,或者,第四阈值是通信组配置的,或者,第四阈值是网络设备配置的,或者,第四阈值是基于第二UE的最大信道占用时间COT确定的,其中,第二UE的最大COT与第二UE发送的第一参考信号相关联。In a possible design, the fourth threshold is preconfigured, or the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fourth threshold is configured by the network device, or the fourth threshold is based on the maximum The channel occupancy time COT is determined, wherein the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,还用于接收来自第二UE的第一指示信息,其中,第一指示信息指示第二UE的最大COT和剩余COT中的至少一项。处理单元,用于根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,以及第一指示信息,确定发送单元在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,第二时间单元属于第二UE的剩余COT中的一个时间单元。In a possible design, the receiving unit is further configured to receive first indication information from the second UE, where the first indication information indicates at least one of a maximum COT and a remaining COT of the second UE. The processing unit is configured to determine, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the sending unit transmits in the second time unit, including: according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and at least one sub-time unit The received signal strength of the sub-time unit and the first indication information determine that the sending unit transmits in a second time unit, where the second time unit belongs to a time unit in the remaining COT of the second UE.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,还用于接收来自第二UE的第二指示信息,其中,第二指示信息指示通信装置在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型,或者,第二指示信息指示通信装置共享第二UE的COT。In a possible design, the receiving unit is further configured to receive second indication information from the second UE, where the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the communication device before the second time unit, or, the second The indication information instructs the communication device to share the COT of the second UE.
在一种可能的设计中,发送单元,还用于在第三资源上发送第三参考信号,其中,第三资源在至少一个子时间单元之后,且在第二时间单元之前,第三参考信号用于指示通信装置在第二时间单元进行传输。In a possible design, the sending unit is further configured to send a third reference signal on a third resource, where the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit and before the second time unit, and the third reference signal Used to instruct the communication device to transmit in the second time unit.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,使得该通信装置执行上述任一方面或任一方面任一种可能的设计中第一UE所执行的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中的第一UE,或者实现上述第一UE功能的芯片。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device performs any of the above-mentioned aspects or any of the aspects. The method performed by the first UE in one possible design. The communication device may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or a chip implementing the function of the first UE.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器;所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取存储器中的指令并执行,以使该通信装置执行如上述任一方面或任一方面任一种可能的设计中的第一UE所执行的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中的第一UE,或者,或者实现上述第一UE功能的芯片。In a fourth aspect, there is provided a communication device, including: a processor; the processor is coupled with a memory, and is used to read and execute instructions in the memory, so that the communication device performs any or all of the above-mentioned aspects The method performed by the first UE in any possible design. The communications device may be the first UE in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or, or a chip that implements the function of the first UE.
第五方面,提供一种芯片,包括处理电路和输入输出接口。其中,输入输出接口用于与芯片之外的模块通信,例如,该芯片可以为实现上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中的第一UE功能的芯片。处理电路用于运行计算机程序或指令,以实现以上第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a chip is provided, including a processing circuit and an input/output interface. Wherein, the input and output interface is used to communicate with modules other than the chip, for example, the chip may be a chip implementing the first UE function in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect. The processing circuit is used to run computer programs or instructions to implement the method in the above first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect.
第六方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面中任一项的方法。In a sixth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer can execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned aspects.
第七方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面中任一项的方法。In a seventh aspect, there is provided a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in any one of the above aspects.
第八方面,提供一种电路***,电路***包括处理电路,处理电路被配置为执行如上述任一方面中任一项的方法。In an eighth aspect, a circuit system is provided, and the circuit system includes a processing circuit configured to execute the method according to any one of the above aspects.
其中,第二方面至第八方面中任一种设计所带来的技术效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the technical effect brought about by any one of the designs in the second aspect to the eighth aspect, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method provided above, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请的实施例应用的一种通信***的架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请的实施例应用的再一种通信***的架构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请的实施例应用的又一种通信***的架构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种资源选择的场景示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a resource selection scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5a为本申请实施例提供的一种信道接入的场景示意图;FIG. 5a is a schematic diagram of a channel access scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5b为本申请实施例提供的再一种信道接入的场景示意图;FIG. 5b is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6a为本申请实施例提供的一种侧行链路通信的场景示意图;FIG. 6a is a schematic diagram of a sidelink communication scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6b为本申请实施例提供的一种资源分布示意图;FIG. 6b is a schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a sidelink channel access method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8a为本申请实施例提供的再一种资源分布示意图;Fig. 8a is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8b为本申请实施例提供的又一种资源分布示意图;FIG. 8b is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的再一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10a为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;Fig. 10a is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10b为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;FIG. 10b is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10c为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;Fig. 10c is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10d为本申请实施例提供的又一种资源分布示意图;Fig. 10d is another schematic diagram of resource distribution provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10e为本申请实施例提供的又一种信道接入的场景示意图;FIG. 10e is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图10f为本申请实施例提供的又一种信道接入的场景示意图;FIG. 10f is a schematic diagram of another channel access scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11a为本申请实施例提供的一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;Fig. 11a is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of a reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11b为本申请实施例提供的再一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;FIG. 11b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11c为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;Fig. 11c is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12a为本申请实施例提供的又一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12b为本申请实施例提供的又一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;FIG. 12b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的又一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15a为本申请实施例提供的又一种侧行链路信道接入方法的流程示意图;Fig. 15a is a schematic flowchart of another sidelink channel access method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15b为本申请实施例提供的又一种参考信号的资源映射示意图;FIG. 15b is a schematic diagram of resource mapping of another reference signal provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的再一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请的说明书以及附图中的术语“第一”和“第二”等是用于区别不同的对象,或者用于区别对同一对象的不同处理,而不是用于描述对象的特定顺序。此外,本申请的描述中所提到的术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如 包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、***、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括其他没有列出的步骤或单元,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。The terms "first" and "second" in the specification and drawings of the present application are used to distinguish different objects, or to distinguish different processes for the same object, rather than to describe a specific sequence of objects. In addition, the terms "including" and "having" mentioned in the description of the present application and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes other unlisted steps or units, or optionally also includes Other steps or elements inherent to the process, method, product or apparatus are included. It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used as examples, illustrations or descriptions. Any embodiment or design scheme described as "exemplary" or "for example" in the embodiments of the present application shall not be interpreted as being more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or design schemes. Rather, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner.
本申请实施例可以适用于UE之间通信的***,如车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信***、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)***。下面,以V2X通信***为例,对本申请实施例所适用的通信***进行说明。参见图1、图2和图3,该通信***包括至少两个UE,两个UE之间能够通过侧行链路(sidelink,SL)直接进行通信(图1、图2和图3中均仅示出了两个UE)。可选的,该通信***还包括网络设备。UE还可以与网络设备进行通信。The embodiment of the present application may be applicable to a communication system between UEs, such as a vehicle to everything (V2X) communication system and a device to device (D2D) system. In the following, a V2X communication system is taken as an example to describe the communication system to which the embodiment of the present application is applicable. Referring to Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, the communication system includes at least two UEs, and the two UEs can directly communicate through a side link (sidelink, SL) (in Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, only Two UEs are shown). Optionally, the communication system further includes network equipment. UEs can also communicate with network devices.
V2X通信***可以存在如下的通信场景:车与车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)之间的通信、车与基础设施装置(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)之间的通信、车与应用服务器(vehicle to network,V2N)之间的通信、车与行人的移动终端(vehicle to pedestrain,V2P)之间的通信等。在V2X通信***中,UE之间就是通过侧行链路(sidelink,SL)直接进行通信,无需网络设备的收发过程,不存在上、下行通信链路。The V2X communication system can have the following communication scenarios: communication between vehicle to vehicle (V2V), communication between vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to application server (vehicle to network , V2N) communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian mobile terminal (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) communication, etc. In the V2X communication system, UEs communicate directly through sidelinks (sidelinks, SLs), without a sending and receiving process of network equipment, and there is no uplink and downlink communication links.
其中,UE主要用于接收或者发送数据。具体的,包括向用户提供语音的设备,或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备,或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该UE可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音或数据,或与RAN交互语音和数据。该UE可以包括终端设备、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、V2X终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、签约单元(subscriber unit)、签约站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位***(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。Among them, the UE is mainly used for receiving or sending data. Specifically, it includes a device that provides voice to the user, or includes a device that provides data connectivity to the user, or includes a device that provides both voice and data connectivity to the user. Examples may include a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. The UE can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (radio access network, RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN. The UE may include terminal equipment, wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, V2X terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/machine-type communication (machine-to-machine/machine -type communications, M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, remote station , access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc. For example, it may include mobile phones (or "cellular" phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket, hand-held, computer built-in mobile devices, and the like. For example, personal communication service (PCS) telephone, cordless telephone, session initiation protocol (session initiation protocol, SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA) and other devices. Also includes constrained devices, such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities, etc. For example, it includes barcodes, radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, RFID), sensors, global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing devices.
而如上介绍的各种UE,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。The various UEs described above, if located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, and the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called an on-board unit (OBU). .
本申请实施例中,UE还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为,能够与网络设备进行数据通信的都可以看作UE。In this embodiment of the present application, the UE may further include a relay. Or it can be understood that all those capable of performing data communication with network devices can be regarded as UEs.
本申请实施例中,用于实现UE的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片***,该装置可以被安装在UE中。本申请实施例中,芯 片***可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现UE的功能的装置是UE为例,进行介绍。In this embodiment of the present application, the device for realizing the function of the UE may be a terminal device, or may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the UE. In the embodiment of this application, the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, the UE is used as an example for realizing the functions of the UE, and the introduction is made.
本申请实施例所涉及的网络设备是一种部署在无线接入网用以提供无线通信功能的装置。可选的,网络设备可以指接入网的空中接口上通过一个或多个小区与无线终端通信的设备,其中,实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是支持网络设备实现该功能的装置(比如网络设备中的芯片)。可选的,网络设备可对空中接口进行属性管理。网络设备还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。网络设备包括各种形式的宏基站,微基站(也称为小站),诸如中继站的中继设备或中继设备的芯片,发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP),演进型网络节点(evolved Node B,eNB),下一代网络节点(g Node B,gNB)、连接下一代核心网的演进型节点B(ng evolved Node B,ng-eNB)等。或者,在分布式场景下,网络设备可以是基带单元(base band unit,BBU)和射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU),在云无线接入网(cloud radio access netowrk,CRAN)场景下,网络设备可以是基带池(BBU pool)和RRU。The network device involved in the embodiment of the present application is a device deployed on a radio access network to provide a wireless communication function. Optionally, a network device may refer to a device that communicates with a wireless terminal through one or more cells on the air interface of the access network, where the device that implements the function of the network device may be a network device, or it may be a device that supports the network device to implement the Functional device (such as a chip in a network device). Optionally, the network device can perform attribute management on the air interface. Network devices may also coordinate attribute management for the air interface. Network equipment includes various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay devices such as relay stations or chips of relay devices, transmission reception points (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved network nodes (evolved Node B, eNB), next-generation network node (g Node B, gNB), evolved Node B (ng evolved Node B, ng-eNB) connected to the next-generation core network, etc. Or, in a distributed scenario, the network device can be a base band unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (RRU). In a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario , the network device can be a baseband pool (BBU pool) and RRU.
参见图1、图2和图3,对采用侧行链路通信的两个UE而言,可能存在如下三种通信场景:第一,两个UE均处于同一公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)(如PLMN1)覆盖范围内,如图1所示;第二,仅一个UE处于PLMN(如PLMN1)覆盖范围内,另一个UE处于PLMN(即PLMN1)覆盖范围外,如图2所示;第三,两个UE均处于PLMN(如PLMN1)覆盖范围外,两个UE所处的区域范围无预先配置的小区标识,如图3所示。其中,图1、图2和图3中的虚线椭圆区域均表示PLMN1的覆盖范围。由于两个UE之间采用侧行链路进行通信,因此,无论两个UE是否同时处于PLMN的覆盖范围内,均能够正常进行通信。Referring to Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3, for two UEs using sidelink communication, there may be the following three communication scenarios: first, both UEs are in the same public land mobile network (public land mobile network) , PLMN) (such as PLMN1) coverage, as shown in Figure 1; second, only one UE is within the coverage of the PLMN (such as PLMN1), and the other UE is outside the coverage of the PLMN (ie, PLMN1), as shown in Figure 2 thirdly, the two UEs are outside the coverage of the PLMN (such as PLMN1), and there is no pre-configured cell identity in the area where the two UEs are located, as shown in FIG. 3 . Wherein, the dotted ellipse areas in FIG. 1 , FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 all indicate the coverage of the PLMN1. Since the side link is used for communication between the two UEs, no matter whether the two UEs are within the coverage of the PLMN at the same time, they can communicate normally.
图1、图2和图3所示的通信***可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)或者高级的长期演进(LTE Advanced,LTE-A)***中,也可以应用于第五代移动通信技术(5th generation mobile networks,5G)网络或者未来的其它网络中,当然,还可以应用于LTE和5G混合组网的***中,或者其他***中,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。其中,在不同的网络中,上述通信***中的网络设备、UE可能对应不同的名字,本领域技术人员可以理解的是,名字对设备本身不构成限定。The communication systems shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 can be applied to long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) or advanced long term evolution (LTE Advanced, LTE-A) systems, and can also be applied to the fifth generation of mobile communications Technology (5th generation mobile networks, 5G) networks or other networks in the future, of course, can also be applied to LTE and 5G hybrid networking systems, or other systems, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. Wherein, in different networks, the network devices and UEs in the communication system may correspond to different names, and those skilled in the art can understand that the names do not limit the devices themselves.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面先对本申请实施例中涉及的术语做简单说明。应理解,这些说明仅为便于理解本申请实施例,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, terms involved in the embodiments of the present application will be briefly described below. It should be understood that these descriptions are only for understanding the embodiments of the present application, and shall not constitute any limitation to the present application.
1、接收信号强度(received signal strength,Rss)、接收信号功率、接收信号能量1. Received signal strength (received signal strength, Rss), received signal power, received signal energy
接收信号强度,是指通信设备接收到的信号的强度。在本申请实施例中,接收信号强度,可以解释为接收信号功率,或者,接收信号强度可以解释为接收信号能量。其中,接收信号功率与接收信号能量之间满足:P*t=E。其中,E表示接收信号能量,t表示接收信号的时间长度,P表示接收信号功率。Received signal strength refers to the strength of the signal received by the communication device. In this embodiment of the present application, the received signal strength may be interpreted as received signal power, or the received signal strength may be interpreted as received signal energy. Wherein, the relationship between received signal power and received signal energy satisfies: P*t=E. Among them, E represents the energy of the received signal, t represents the time length of the received signal, and P represents the power of the received signal.
另外,接收信号强度,也可以描述为,接收信号强度指示(received signal strength indicator,RSSI),本申请实施例中,以接收信号强度为例,进行介绍,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,若采用接收信号功率或接收信号强度的实现方式,则属于本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。In addition, received signal strength can also be described as received signal strength indicator (received signal strength indicator, RSSI). In the embodiment of this application, the received signal strength is used as an example to introduce, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to Here, if the implementation of received signal power or received signal strength is adopted, changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application shall be covered within the protection scope of this application.
2、参考信号(reference signals,RS)、参考信号的序列(sequence)2. Reference signals (reference signals, RS), sequence of reference signals (sequence)
参考信号,是用于接收该参考信号的通信设备,进行信道估计或信道探测或接收信号强度测量的一种已知信号。示例性的,参考信号包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)或解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)等。另外,参考信号,也可以有其他名称,如导频信号,本申请实施例中,以参考信号为例,进行介绍。The reference signal is a known signal used by a communication device receiving the reference signal to perform channel estimation or channel detection or receive signal strength measurement. Exemplarily, the reference signal includes a channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS) or a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS). In addition, the reference signal may also have other names, such as a pilot signal. In this embodiment of the present application, the reference signal is used as an example for introduction.
参考信号的序列,是指参考信号在映射到时频资源前的序列,参考信号的一个序列可以包括一个或多个元素。A sequence of reference signals refers to a sequence of reference signals before they are mapped to time-frequency resources, and a sequence of reference signals may include one or more elements.
3、SL资源池(resource pool)3. SL resource pool (resource pool)
SL资源池,可以理解为时频资源的集合,用于UE之间的侧行链路通信。可选的,SL资源池还包括码域资源。SL资源池包括发送和接收物理信道所承载信息的资源。其中,物理信道包括以下至少一种:物理侧行控制信道(physical sidelink control channel,PSCCH)、物理侧行共享信道(physical sidelink shared channel,PSSCH)、物理侧行发现信道(physical sidelink discovery channel,PSDCH)、物理侧行反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel,PSFCH)和物理侧行广播信道(physical sidelink broadcast channel,PSBCH)。侧行链路控制信息(sidelink control information,SCI)可以承载在PSCCH中发送;或者,SCI可以分为两级SCI,其中,第一级SCI承载于PSCCH中,第二级SCI承载于PSSCH中。PSSCH用于承载数据信道信息,如第二级SCI(2nd-stage SCI)、数据信息和侧行信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)的反馈信息中的至少一种。PSDCH用于承载发现消息。PSFCH用于承载侧行反馈信息。PSBCH用于承载侧行同步相关信息。The SL resource pool can be understood as a collection of time-frequency resources, and is used for side link communication between UEs. Optionally, the SL resource pool also includes code domain resources. The SL resource pool includes resources for sending and receiving information carried by physical channels. Wherein, the physical channel includes at least one of the following: physical sidelink control channel (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH), physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH), physical sidelink discovery channel (physical sidelink discovery channel, PSDCH) ), physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH) and physical sidelink broadcast channel (physical sidelink broadcast channel, PSBCH). Sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI) can be carried in the PSCCH and sent; or, the SCI can be divided into two levels of SCI, wherein the first level of SCI is carried in the PSCCH, and the second level of SCI is carried in the PSSCH. The PSSCH is used to carry data channel information, such as at least one of second-level SCI (2nd-stage SCI), data information, and side channel state information (channel state information, CSI) feedback information. PSDCH is used to carry discovery messages. PSFCH is used to carry sidelink feedback information. The PSBCH is used to carry information related to sidelink synchronization.
SL资源池在时域上包括一个或多个时间单元。其中,一个时间单元可以为一个或若干个符号,一个或若干个时隙(slot),一个或若干个微时隙(mini-slot),一个或若干个子帧,或一个或若干个帧等。在本申请实施例中,以时隙为例,对时间单元进行介绍。在一个SL资源池内,多个时间单元在时间上可以是连续的,也可以是离散的。The SL resource pool includes one or more time units in the time domain. Wherein, one time unit may be one or several symbols, one or several time slots (slot), one or several mini-slots (mini-slot), one or several subframes, or one or several frames. In this embodiment of the present application, a time slot is taken as an example to introduce a time unit. In an SL resource pool, multiple time units can be continuous or discrete in time.
SL资源池在频域上包括一个或多个频域单元。其中,一个频域单元可以是一个或若干个资源元素(resource element,RE),一个或若干个资源块(resource block,RB),或一个或若干个子信道(sub channel)。其中,子信道的大小,可以理解为,一个子信道包括一个或多个在频域上连续的(continuous)或交错的(interlaced)RB数量。例如,一个子信道可以包括10、12、15、20、25或50个RB。RB在物理层对应的名称记为物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)。The SL resource pool includes one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain. Wherein, a frequency domain unit may be one or several resource elements (resource element, RE), one or several resource blocks (resource block, RB), or one or several sub-channels (sub channel). Wherein, the size of the subchannel may be understood as that one subchannel includes one or more continuous (continuous) or interlaced (interlaced) RB quantities in the frequency domain. For example, one subchannel may include 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 or 50 RBs. The name corresponding to the RB at the physical layer is recorded as a physical resource block (physical resource block, PRB).
本申请实施例中的符号、微时隙、时隙、子帧、帧、RE、RB、PRB和子信道的定义可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)的相关技术规范。For definitions of symbols, mini-slots, time slots, subframes, frames, REs, RBs, PRBs, and subchannels in the embodiments of the present application, reference may be made to relevant technical specifications of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP).
4、SL的传输模式(mode)、资源选择4. SL transmission mode (mode), resource selection
UE与UE之间的通信过程有两种资源选择模式,即资源选择模式(mode)1和资源选择模式2。其中,资源选择模式1也简称为模式1,资源选择模式2也简称为模式2。在本申请实施例中,仅以资源选择模式1、资源选择模式2为例进行介绍。There are two resource selection modes in the UE-to-UE communication process, namely, resource selection mode (mode) 1 and resource selection mode 2 . Wherein, resource selection mode 1 is also referred to as mode 1 for short, and resource selection mode 2 is also referred to as mode 2 for short. In this embodiment of the application, only resource selection mode 1 and resource selection mode 2 are used as examples for introduction.
在资源选择模式1中,UE的传输资源是由网络设备分配的,UE在网络设备分配的资源上传输信息。网络设备为UE分配单次的传输资源,也可以为UE分配周期性的传输资源。In resource selection mode 1, the transmission resources of the UE are allocated by the network equipment, and the UE transmits information on the resources allocated by the network equipment. The network device allocates a single transmission resource to the UE, and may also allocate periodic transmission resources to the UE.
在资源选择模式2中,UE可以采用侦听(sensing)+预留(reservation)的方式确定传输资源,或者随机选择资源,或者由通信组中的其他UE分配传输资源。下面,以UE3为例, 对UE采用侦听+预留的方式确定传输资源的过程进行介绍,具体步骤如图4所示:In resource selection mode 2, the UE may determine transmission resources in a manner of sensing (sensing) + reservation (reservation), or select resources randomly, or allocate transmission resources by other UEs in the communication group. In the following, taking UE3 as an example, the process of determining transmission resources by the UE in the way of listening + reservation is introduced, and the specific steps are shown in Figure 4:
步骤一、UE3获取待发送的数据信息。 Step 1, UE3 acquires data information to be sent.
示例性的,参见图4,UE3在时隙n或时隙n附近有新的数据信息到达,需要向其他UE发送数据信息,触发资源选择,即确定用于数据信息传输的资源。For example, referring to FIG. 4 , UE3 has new data information arriving at or near time slot n, and needs to send data information to other UEs, trigger resource selection, that is, determine resources for data information transmission.
步骤二、UE3确定资源选择窗(resource selection window)。Step 2: UE3 determines a resource selection window.
其中,资源选择窗即为时隙n之后的预设时长。示例性的,参见图4,资源选择窗的起始时隙记为:n+T 1,资源选择窗的结束时隙记为:n+T 2。其中,T 1和T 2的取值范围可以参见相关技术,此处不再赘述。 Wherein, the resource selection window is a preset duration after time slot n. Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 4 , the start time slot of the resource selection window is marked as: n+T 1 , and the end time slot of the resource selection window is marked as: n+T 2 . Wherein, the value ranges of T1 and T2 can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
步骤三、UE3确定侦听窗(sensing window)。Step 3: UE3 determines a sensing window.
示例性的,侦听窗即为时隙n之前的预设时长,如1000个时隙(或1000·2 μ个时隙)。参见图4,侦听窗的起始时隙记为:n-T 0,侦听窗的结束时隙记为:n-T proc,0。其中,T 0和T proc,0的取值范围可以参见相关技术,此处不再赘述。 Exemplarily, the listening window is a preset duration before time slot n, such as 1000 time slots (or 1000·2 μ time slots). Referring to FIG. 4 , the start time slot of the listening window is marked as: nT 0 , and the ending time slot of the listening window is marked as: nT proc,0 . Wherein, the value ranges of T 0 and T proc,0 can refer to related technologies, and will not be repeated here.
应理解,UE3可以先执行步骤二,再执行步骤三,也可以先执行步骤三,再执行步骤二,还可以同时执行步骤二和步骤三,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that UE3 may perform step 2 first and then step 3, or may perform step 3 first and then step 2, or may perform step 2 and step 3 simultaneously, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
步骤四、UE3根据侦听窗的侦听结果,在资源选择窗中确定预约资源。Step 4: UE3 determines reserved resources in the resource selection window according to the interception result of the interception window.
其中,侦听结果包括以下至少一项:PSCCH中承载的第一级SCI、该PSCCH的参考信号接收强度(reference signal received power,RSRP)的测量值、该PSCCH所对应的PSSCH的RSRP测量值。以图4为例,该PSCCH占用的资源如图4中斜线填充的方格所示。该PSCCH包括UE2发送的PSCCH,UE1发送的PSCCH,以及UE4发送的PSCCH。Wherein, the listening result includes at least one of the following: the first-level SCI carried in the PSCCH, the measured value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of the PSCCH, and the measured value of the RSRP of the PSSCH corresponding to the PSCCH. Taking FIG. 4 as an example, the resources occupied by the PSCCH are shown in the squares filled with oblique lines in FIG. 4 . The PSCCH includes the PSCCH sent by UE2, the PSCCH sent by UE1, and the PSCCH sent by UE4.
其中,预约资源可以是周期性的,也可以是非周期性的。以图4为例,第一级SCI指示了发送该第一级SCI的UE预留了后续传输所需的时频资源,如图4中网格线填充的方格所示。以图4为例,预约资源包括UE2的预约资源、UE1的预约资源、UE4的预约资源。Wherein, the resource reservation may be periodic or non-periodic. Taking FIG. 4 as an example, the first-level SCI indicates that the UE sending the first-level SCI has reserved time-frequency resources required for subsequent transmission, as shown in the grid filled squares in FIG. 4 . Taking FIG. 4 as an example, the reserved resources include the reserved resources of UE2, the reserved resources of UE1, and the reserved resources of UE4.
示例性的,将资源选择窗内的所有时频资源组成候选资源集合S_A,且该候选资源集合S_A中的资源数量为A。Exemplarily, all the time-frequency resources within the resource selection window form a candidate resource set S_A, and the number of resources in the candidate resource set S_A is A.
若侦听结果中PSCCH的RSRP的测量值高于RSRP阈值,且该PSCCH承载的第一级SCI指示了发送该第一级SCI的UE预留了后续传输所需的时频资源,则UE3将该预约资源排除在候选资源集合S_A之外。以图4为例,若上述三个UE(即UE2、UE1和UE4)发送的PSCCH的RSRP测量值均高于RSRP阈值,则UE3将上述三个UE(即UE2、UE1和UE4)的预约资源排除在候选资源集合S_A之外。或者,若侦听结果中PSSCH的RSRP的测量值高于RSRP阈值,且该PSSCH对应的第一级SCI指示了发送该第一级SCI的UE预留了后续传输所需的时频资源,则UE3将预约资源排除在候选资源集合S_A之外。If the measured RSRP value of the PSCCH in the listening result is higher than the RSRP threshold, and the first-level SCI carried by the PSCCH indicates that the UE sending the first-level SCI has reserved the time-frequency resources required for subsequent transmissions, UE3 will The reserved resource is excluded from the set of candidate resources S_A. Taking Figure 4 as an example, if the RSRP measurement values of the PSCCHs sent by the above three UEs (ie UE2, UE1 and UE4) are all higher than the RSRP threshold, then UE3 will reserve resources of the above three UEs (ie UE2, UE1 and UE4) Excluded from candidate resource set S_A. Or, if the measured value of the RSRP of the PSSCH in the listening result is higher than the RSRP threshold, and the first-level SCI corresponding to the PSSCH indicates that the UE sending the first-level SCI has reserved time-frequency resources required for subsequent transmissions, then UE3 excludes the reserved resources from the set of candidate resources S_A.
此时,记该候选资源集合S_A中剩余的资源数量等于B。如果候选资源集合S_A中剩余的B个资源小于资源选择窗总资源的X%,则UE3提升上述RSRP阈值,如提升3dB,直至满足候选资源集合S_A中剩余的资源大于或等于资源选择窗总资源的X%。其中,X%的取值由资源池配置。其中,UE3从候选资源集合S_A中剩余的资源中确定预约资源。At this time, it is recorded that the number of remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A is equal to B. If the remaining B resources in the candidate resource set S_A are less than X% of the total resources in the resource selection window, UE3 increases the above RSRP threshold, for example, by 3dB, until the remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A are greater than or equal to the total resources in the resource selection window X% of. Wherein, the value of X% is configured by the resource pool. Wherein, UE3 determines reserved resources from the remaining resources in the candidate resource set S_A.
步骤五、UE3在预约资源上发送数据信息。 Step 5, UE3 sends data information on reserved resources.
需要说明的是,预约资源,可以理解为,某一UE(如UE3)预定了后续的某些时频资源。该UE可以在该预约资源上收发数据信息,该UE也可以不使用该预约资源,即该预约资源未被该UE使用。在本申请实施例中,预约资源,是指,UE需要传输信号的资源。在本 申请实施例中,预约资源,可以理解为,UE的传输资源。It should be noted that reserving resources may be understood as that a certain UE (such as UE3) reserves some subsequent time-frequency resources. The UE may send and receive data information on the reserved resource, or the UE may not use the reserved resource, that is, the reserved resource is not used by the UE. In the embodiment of the present application, reserving resources refers to resources that the UE needs to transmit signals. In the embodiment of the present application, the resource reservation may be understood as the transmission resource of the UE.
5、同***、异***5. Same system, different system
同***,是指采用同一个无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的通信***。The same system refers to communication systems using the same radio access technology (RAT).
异***,是指采用不同RAT的通信***。Different systems refer to communication systems using different RATs.
示例性的,以侧行链路通信***为例,第一UE是侧行链路通信***中的UE。此种情况下,对于第一UE而言,同***,是指侧行链路非授权频谱(sidelink in unlicensed spectrum,SL-U)***,异***,是指非SL-U***,如新空口非授权频谱(new radio in unlicensed spectrum,NR-U)***,无线局域网(wireless fidelity,WiFi)***等。Exemplarily, taking a sidelink communication system as an example, the first UE is a UE in the sidelink communication system. In this case, for the first UE, the same system refers to the sidelink in unlicensed spectrum (SL-U) system, and the different system refers to the non-SL-U system, such as the new air interface Unlicensed spectrum (new radio in unlicensed spectrum, NR-U) system, wireless local area network (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system, etc.
6、非授权频谱(unlicensed spectrum)6. Unlicensed spectrum (unlicensed spectrum)
目前,很多通信***已经开始使用非授权频谱资源。其中,在非授权频谱进行SL通信的通信***,描述为SL-U***。在非授权频谱进行5G通信的通信***,描述为NR-U***。由于非授权频谱资源的共享性,容易造成同一资源被不同的通信设备同时使用,因此,需要一种合理的资源竞争机制,保证使用同一非授权频段上的不同通信设备(如UE)之间公平共存的进行资源竞争。At present, many communication systems have begun to use unlicensed spectrum resources. Among them, a communication system that performs SL communication in an unlicensed frequency spectrum is described as an SL-U system. The communication system for 5G communication in unlicensed spectrum is described as NR-U system. Due to the sharing of unlicensed spectrum resources, it is easy to cause the same resource to be used by different communication devices at the same time. Therefore, a reasonable resource competition mechanism is needed to ensure fairness between different communication devices (such as UEs) using the same unlicensed frequency band. Coexistence competes for resources.
目前,常用的是先听后说(listen before talk,LBT)机制,以实现资源公平竞争的问题,该机制要求通信设备在使用非授权频谱资源发送数据信息之前,先监听信道,进行空闲信道评估(clear channel assessment,CCA)检测,以确保信道空闲的情况下才能进行信号传输。其中,UE通过CCA检测到信道空闲,又可以称为LBT成功。反之,UE通过CCA检测到信道忙,又可以称为LBT失败。At present, the listen before talk (LBT) mechanism is commonly used to achieve fair competition for resources. This mechanism requires communication devices to monitor the channel before using unlicensed spectrum resources to send data information, and perform idle channel assessment. (clear channel assessment, CCA) detection to ensure that the signal can only be transmitted when the channel is idle. Wherein, the UE detects that the channel is idle through the CCA, which may also be called LBT success. On the contrary, if the UE detects that the channel is busy through CCA, it may also be called LBT failure.
其中,不同类型的LBT机制介绍如下:Among them, different types of LBT mechanisms are introduced as follows:
(1)、类型1(Type 1)信道接入过程(1), Type 1 (Type 1) channel access process
UE在执行Type 1信道接入过程时,需进行随机回退(Backoff),即在发送信号前需要感知到随机数量的空闲感知时隙(sensing slot)。When the UE performs the Type 1 channel access process, it needs to perform a random backoff (Backoff), that is, it needs to sense a random number of idle sensing slots (sensing slots) before sending a signal.
UE在发送信号前需要确定一个推迟时间(defer duration)内的感知时隙均为空闲状态。其中,推迟时间满足:Before sending a signal, the UE needs to determine that the sensing slots within a defer duration are all idle. Among them, the delay time satisfies:
T d=T f+m p×T sl   公式(1) T d =T f +m p ×T sl formula (1)
其中,T d表示推迟时间的时长,T f表示持续时间的时长,如16us,T sl表示感知时隙的时长,如9us,m p表示感知时隙的数量,m p的取值与UE的业务优先级相关。若推迟时间T d内的所有感知时隙均为空闲状态,则UE进入随机回退状态。 Among them, T d represents the length of the delay time, T f represents the duration of the duration, such as 16us, T sl represents the duration of the sensing time slot, such as 9us, m p represents the number of sensing time slots, and the value of m p is the same as that of the UE Related to business priorities. If all sensing slots within the delay time T d are idle, the UE enters a random backoff state.
具体地,首先设置一个随机回退计数器N=N int,其中,N int是一个服从0~CW p区间均匀分布的随机数,CW min,p≤CW p≤CW max,p,CW min,p和CW max,p均是与UE的业务优先级相关的参数。如果UE感知到一个感知时隙为空闲状态,则令随机回退计数器减1,即N=N-1,当N=0时,UE可以接入信道,进行信号传输。如果UE感知到一个感知时隙为非空闲状态,则需要持续感知,例如,UE再次感知到一个推迟时间T d中的所有感知时隙均为空闲状态,则UE重新进入随机回退状态。 Specifically, first set a random backoff counter N=N int , where N int is a random number that is uniformly distributed in the interval from 0 to CW p , CW min,p ≤CW p ≤CW max,p , CW min,p and CW max,p are parameters related to the service priority of the UE. If the UE perceives that a sensing time slot is in an idle state, the random backoff counter is decremented by 1, that is, N=N-1. When N=0, the UE can access the channel for signal transmission. If the UE perceives that a sensing time slot is not idle, continuous sensing is required. For example, the UE perceives that all sensing time slots in a delay time T d are idle again, and then the UE re-enters the random backoff state.
如图5a所示,假设UE的初始随机回退计数器为3,则在感知到一个推迟时间中所有感知时隙为空闲之后,再感知到3个感知时隙为空闲,才可以接入信道,进行信号传输。例如,在进入随机回退状态之后,每感知到一个感知时间为空闲,则随机回退计数器减1,直至随机回退计数器为0,UE才可以接入信道,完成LBT过程。As shown in Figure 5a, assuming that the UE's initial random backoff counter is 3, it can only access the channel after sensing that all sensing time slots are idle for a delay time and then sensing that 3 sensing time slots are idle. for signal transmission. For example, after entering the random backoff state, the random backoff counter is decremented by 1 every time it senses that the sensing time is idle, until the random backoff counter is 0, the UE can access the channel and complete the LBT process.
如图5b所示,假设UE的初始随机回退计数器为6,则在感知到一个推迟时间中所有感知时隙为空闲之后,进入随机回退状态。UE感知到一个感知时隙是空闲之后,随机回退计数器的取值降为5。之后,UE感知到信道忙。UE需要重新感知到一个推迟时间中所有感知时隙为空闲之后,重新进入随机回退状态。此种情况下,随机回退计数器从5开始减1,直至随机回退计数器为0,UE才可以接入信道,完成LBT过程。As shown in Figure 5b, assuming that the initial random backoff counter of the UE is 6, it enters the random backoff state after sensing that all sensing slots are idle for a delay time. After the UE perceives that a sensing time slot is idle, the value of the random backoff counter is reduced to 5. Afterwards, the UE perceives that the channel is busy. The UE needs to re-enter the random back-off state after sensing that all sensing slots are idle for a delay time. In this case, the random backoff counter is decremented from 5 by 1 until the random backoff counter is 0, the UE can access the channel and complete the LBT process.
对于UE来说,UE完成LBT过程之后,信道占用时间(channel occupancy time,COT)应不超过T mcot,p。其中,T mcot,p是与UE的业务优先级相关的参数。在COT内,发起设备可以将该COT内的资源共享给一个或多个响应设备,这些响应设备在接入信道前不需要执行Type 1信道接入过程,仅需执行Type 2信道接入过程。比如,发起设备可以是网络设备,响应设备可以是该网络设备服务的UE;或者,发起设备可以是UE,响应设备可以是该UE所接入的网络设备。其中,执行了上述Type 1信道接入过程的UE,可以称为发起设备。 For the UE, after the UE completes the LBT process, the channel occupancy time (channel occupancy time, COT) should not exceed T mcot,p . Wherein, T mcot,p is a parameter related to the service priority of the UE. In the COT, the initiating device can share resources in the COT with one or more responding devices. These responding devices do not need to perform the Type 1 channel access process before accessing the channel, but only need to perform the Type 2 channel access process. For example, the initiating device may be a network device, and the responding device may be a UE served by the network device; or, the initiating device may be a UE, and the responding device may be a network device accessed by the UE. Wherein, the UE that has executed the above Type 1 channel access procedure may be referred to as an initiating device.
(2)、类型2(Type 2)信道接入过程(2), Type 2 (Type 2) channel access process
UE在执行Type 2信道接入过程时,不需要进行随机回退,即在发送信号前需要感知到确定数目的空闲感知时隙。其中,Type 2信道接入过程包括Type 2A信道接入过程、Type 2B信道接入过程和Type 2C信道接入过程。在Type 2A信道接入过程中,感知时间应大于或等于25us;在Type 2B信道接入过程中,感知时间应大于或等于16us;在Type 2C信道接入过程中,不需要进行感知,但传输时间不应超过584us。When the UE performs the Type 2 channel access process, it does not need to perform random back-off, that is, it needs to perceive a certain number of idle sensing time slots before sending a signal. Among them, the Type 2 channel access process includes the Type 2A channel access process, Type 2B channel access process and Type 2C channel access process. In the process of Type 2A channel access, the sensing time should be greater than or equal to 25us; in the process of Type 2B channel access, the sensing time should be greater than or equal to 16us; in the process of Type 2C channel access, sensing is not required, but transmission The time should not exceed 584us.
需要说明的是,在Type 1信道接入过程和Type 2信道接入过程中,UE确定每个感知时隙是否空闲时,是以20MHz带宽大小为粒度进行能量测量。如果测量到的总能量不超过第一阈值,则可以认为,该感知时隙空闲,否则认为非空闲。It should be noted that during the Type 1 channel access process and Type 2 channel access process, when the UE determines whether each sensing time slot is idle, energy measurement is performed with a granularity of 20MHz bandwidth. If the measured total energy does not exceed the first threshold, it may be considered that the sensing time slot is idle, otherwise it may be considered not idle.
在SL-U***中,为了满足非授权频谱法规要求,UE在接入信道前还需要进行LBT。然而,SL-U***中,UE可以通过资源预留的方式,规避同***其他UE对自身的干扰,而LBT同时规避了同***其他UE对自身的干扰,以及异***的通信设备对自身的干扰,如果在SL-U***中直接采用NR-U***中的LBT机制,则可能由于同***其他UE占据信道,导致LBT失败,无法与同***其他UE占据相邻时隙,资源利用率较低。下面,结合图6a和图6b进行详细介绍:In the SL-U system, in order to meet the requirements of unlicensed spectrum regulations, the UE needs to perform LBT before accessing the channel. However, in the SL-U system, the UE can avoid the interference of other UEs in the same system by reserving resources, and LBT can also avoid the interference of other UEs in the same system and the interference of communication equipment in different systems. Interference, if the LBT mechanism in the NR-U system is directly used in the SL-U system, it may be that other UEs in the same system occupy the channel, resulting in LBT failure, unable to occupy adjacent time slots with other UEs in the same system, and the resource utilization rate is low. Low. Below, a detailed introduction will be made in conjunction with Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b:
如图6a所示,图6a中示出了UE1、UE2和UE3之间的信息交互过程。其中,对于UE3来说,UE3检测到的信号能量介绍如下:UE1与UE2之间的信号能量小于阈值,UE1与UE3之间的信号能量大于阈值,UE2与UE3之间的信号能量大于阈值。As shown in Fig. 6a, Fig. 6a shows an information exchange process among UE1, UE2 and UE3. Among them, for UE3, the signal energy detected by UE3 is introduced as follows: the signal energy between UE1 and UE2 is less than the threshold, the signal energy between UE1 and UE3 is greater than the threshold, and the signal energy between UE2 and UE3 is greater than the threshold.
如图6b所示,对于UE3来说,基于上述信号能量的介绍,UE3通过资源选择机制,排除了UE1的预约资源和UE2的预约资源,UE3最终确定的预约资源,如图6b所示。也就是说,UE3通过资源选择机制,来选择资源,以规避同***中其他UE对自身的干扰。相应的,UE3的预约资源与UE1和UE2的预约资源不同。如图6b所示,UE1的预约资源和UE2的预约资源早于UE3的预约资源。UE1的预约资源与UE3的预约资源在时域上相邻。对于UE3来说,UE3在自身预约资源前执行Type1信道接入过程,如在UE1的预约资源所在时隙上执行Type1信道接入过程时,由于UE1在前一个时隙进行数据传输,所以,UE3无法进行随机回退,导致自身预约资源可不用,资源利用率低。As shown in Figure 6b, for UE3, based on the introduction of the above signal energy, UE3 excludes the reserved resources of UE1 and UE2 through the resource selection mechanism, and the reserved resources finally determined by UE3 are shown in Figure 6b. That is to say, UE3 selects resources through a resource selection mechanism to avoid interference to itself by other UEs in the same system. Correspondingly, the reserved resources of UE3 are different from the reserved resources of UE1 and UE2. As shown in FIG. 6b, the reserved resource of UE1 and the reserved resource of UE2 are earlier than the reserved resource of UE3. The reserved resource of UE1 is adjacent to the reserved resource of UE3 in the time domain. For UE3, UE3 performs the Type1 channel access process before its own resource reservation. For example, when performing the Type1 channel access process on the time slot where UE1's reserved resource is located, since UE1 performs data transmission in the previous time slot, UE3 Unable to perform random rollback, resulting in unusable reserved resources and low resource utilization.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供了一种侧行链路信道接入方法,本申请实施例侧行链路信道接入方法应用于图1、图2或图3的通信***。在本申请实施例侧行链路信道接入方法中, 第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第一参考信号,第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。也就是说,第一参考信号的接收信号强度表征了第一UE所在通信***中的接收信号强度,以排除第一UE所在通信***中其他UE对自身的干扰。至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,既能够表征第一UE所在通信***中其他UE对自身的干扰,又能够表征除第一UE所在通信***之外其他通信***(可以称为异***)中的通信设备对自身的干扰。第一UE既兼顾了自身所在通信***的接收信号强度,又兼顾了至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,来确定至少一个子时间单元是否被其他通信***中的通信设备占用,进而确定自身能否在第二时间单元上进行传输。这样一来,即使同***的其他UE在第二时间单元之前占用信道,第一UE也能够与同***的其他UE采用时分复用方式占用信道,提高资源利用率。In view of this, an embodiment of the present application provides a sidelink channel access method, and the sidelink channel access method in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system in FIG. 1 , FIG. 2 or FIG. 3 . In the sidelink channel access method in the embodiment of the present application, the first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit, and the first UE detects the received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit, The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE performs transmission in the second time unit. That is to say, the received signal strength of the first reference signal represents the received signal strength of the communication system where the first UE is located, so as to eliminate interference to itself from other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located. The received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can not only represent the interference of other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located, but also can represent the interference in other communication systems (which can be called different systems) except the communication system where the first UE is located. The communication equipment interferes with itself. The first UE not only takes into account the received signal strength of the communication system where it is located, but also takes into account the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit to determine whether at least one sub-time unit is occupied by a communication device in another communication system, and then determines that it can No to transmit on the second time unit. In this way, even if other UEs in the same system occupy the channel before the second time unit, the first UE can occupy the channel with other UEs in the same system in a time-division multiplexing manner, thereby improving resource utilization.
下面,结合图7,对本申请实施例提出的侧行链路信道接入方法700进行详细介绍。在本申请实施例中,时间单元,可以包括一定数量的符号、时隙、子帧、帧等,在本申请实施例中,以时隙为例,对时间单元进行介绍。应理解,时间单元,也可以有其他名称,如时域单元,本申请实施例中以时间单元为例,进行介绍,在此作统一说明,后续不再赘述。子时间单元可以包括一定数量的感知时隙。在本申请实施例中,以感知时隙为例,对子时间单元进行介绍。Next, with reference to FIG. 7 , a sidelink channel access method 700 proposed in the embodiment of the present application is introduced in detail. In the embodiment of the present application, a time unit may include a certain number of symbols, time slots, subframes, frames, etc. In the embodiment of the present application, time slots are taken as an example to introduce the time unit. It should be understood that a time unit may also have other names, such as a time domain unit. In this embodiment of the present application, the time unit is used as an example for introduction, and a unified description is given here, and details will not be described later. A sub-time unit may include a certain number of sensing slots. In the embodiment of the present application, the sub-time unit is introduced by taking the sensing time slot as an example.
本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字。在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。The names of messages between network elements or the names of parameters in messages in the following embodiments of the present application are just examples, and may be other names in specific implementations. The description is unified here, and will not be described in detail below.
S701、第二UE在第一时间单元上发送第一参考信号。相应的,第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第一参考信号。S701. The second UE sends a first reference signal in a first time unit. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit.
其中,第一UE与第二UE属于同一通信***,如SL-U通信***。示例性的,以图8a为例,第一UE可以是UE3,第二UE可以是UE1。当第二UE是UE1时,第一时间单元是第一个时隙。关于第一参考信号的介绍,可以参见图11a、图11b、图11c、图12a、图12b和图13的介绍,此处暂不赘述。Wherein, the first UE and the second UE belong to the same communication system, such as the SL-U communication system. Exemplarily, taking FIG. 8a as an example, the first UE may be UE3, and the second UE may be UE1. When the second UE is UE1, the first time unit is the first time slot. For the introduction of the first reference signal, please refer to the introduction of FIG. 11a, FIG. 11b, FIG. 11c, FIG. 12a, FIG. 12b and FIG.
S702、第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。S702. The first UE detects received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit.
示例性的,子时间单元的介绍如下:Exemplarily, the introduction of the sub-time unit is as follows:
每个子时间单元可以包括一个感知时隙。子时间单元的类型可以包括两种,即第一子时间单元和第二子时间单元。Each sub-time unit may include a sensing slot. There are two types of sub-time units, ie, the first sub-time unit and the second sub-time unit.
其中,第一子时间单元,是指第二UE在第一时间单元上发送信号的子时间单元,如第一子时间单元位于第一时间单元的除间隔(gap,GAP)符号以外的其他符号中,例如,第一时间单元中第二个符号至第十三个符号之间的符号。Wherein, the first sub-time unit refers to the sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal on the first time unit, for example, the first sub-time unit is located in other symbols except the interval (gap, GAP) symbol in the first time unit , for example, the symbols between the second symbol and the thirteenth symbol in the first time unit.
其中,第二子时间单元,是指同***其他UE未发送信号的子时间单元,如第二子时间单元位于第一时间单元的GAP符号中;或者,第二子时间单元位于其他时间单元(除第一时间单元之外的其他时间单元)的GAP符号中;或者,第二子时间单元位于第一时间单元的除GAP符号以外的其他符号(或者可以称为非GAP符号)中。其中,将第二子时间单元所在的非GAP符号,记为目标符号。目标符号满足如下情况:第二UE在目标符号上未发送信号。对应的,对于第一UE来说,第一UE虽然能够接收到第二UE的第一参考信号,但未在第一 时间单元的目标符号上接收到第二UE的信号。Wherein, the second sub-time unit refers to a sub-time unit that does not send signals to other UEs in the same system, for example, the second sub-time unit is located in the GAP symbol of the first time unit; or, the second sub-time unit is located in other time units ( In GAP symbols of other time units except the first time unit); or, the second sub-time unit is located in other symbols (or may be referred to as non-GAP symbols) of the first time unit except for the GAP symbols. Wherein, the non-GAP symbol where the second sub-time unit is located is recorded as the target symbol. The target symbol satisfies the following condition: the second UE does not send a signal on the target symbol. Correspondingly, for the first UE, although the first UE can receive the first reference signal of the second UE, it does not receive the signal of the second UE on the target symbol of the first time unit.
应理解,在第一UE所在通信***中,每个UE在GAP符号上不发送信号,GAP符号可以用于UE进行收发转换。It should be understood that, in the communication system where the first UE is located, each UE does not send a signal on the GAP symbol, and the GAP symbol can be used for the UE to perform transceiving conversion.
示例性的,如图9所示,S702的实现过程介绍如下:S702包括S702a,但不包括S702b,如图9中示例1所在的虚线方框所示;或者,S702包括S702b,但不包括S702a,如图9中示例2所在的虚线方框所示;或者,S702包括S702a和S702b,如图9中示例3所在的虚线方框所示。其中,S702a和S702b的介绍如下:Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 9, the implementation process of S702 is introduced as follows: S702 includes S702a, but does not include S702b, as shown in the dotted box in Example 1 in Figure 9; or, S702 includes S702b, but does not include S702a , as shown in the dashed box of Example 2 in FIG. 9 ; or, S702 includes S702a and S702b , as shown in the dashed box of Example 3 in FIG. 9 . Among them, the introduction of S702a and S702b is as follows:
S702a、第一UE在第一子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。S702a. The first UE detects received signal strength in the first sub-time unit.
示例性的,第一子时间单元的数量可以是一个或多个。每个第一子时间单元可以是一个感知时隙。第一子时间单元可以位于第一时间单元的非GAP符号中。也就是说,第一UE在第一时间单元的非GAP符号中的感知时隙上检测接收信号强度。Exemplarily, the number of the first sub-time units may be one or more. Each first sub-time unit may be a sensing time slot. The first sub-time unit may be located in a non-GAP symbol of the first time unit. That is, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slots in the non-GAP symbols of the first time unit.
S702b、第一UE在第二子时间单元上检测接收信号强度。S702b. The first UE detects the received signal strength in the second sub-time unit.
示例性的,第二子时间单元的数量可以是一个或多个。每个第二子时间单元可以是一个感知时隙。Exemplarily, the number of second sub-time units may be one or more. Each second sub-time unit may be a sensing time slot.
例如,第二子时间单元可以位于第一时间单元的GAP符号中。也就是说,第一UE在第一时间单元的GAP符号中的感知时隙上检测接收信号强度。For example, the second sub-time unit may be located in the GAP symbol of the first time unit. That is, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slot in the GAP symbol of the first time unit.
再如,第二子时间单元可以位于其他时间单元(除第一时间单元之外的其他时间单元)的GAP符号中。也就是说,第一UE在其他时间单元(除第一时间单元之外的其他时间单元)的GAP符号中的感知时隙上检测接收信号强度。For another example, the second sub-time unit may be located in the GAP symbols of other time units (time units other than the first time unit). That is to say, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing slots in the GAP symbols of other time units (other time units than the first time unit).
又如,第二子时间单元可以位于第一时间单元的非GAP符号(如索引为a的符号)中,如上述目标符号。也就是说,第一UE在第一时间单元的非GAP符号(如上述目标符号)中的感知时隙上检测接收信号强度。As another example, the second sub-time unit may be located in the non-GAP symbol (such as the symbol with index a) of the first time unit, such as the above-mentioned target symbol. That is to say, the first UE detects the received signal strength on the sensing time slot in the non-GAP symbol (such as the above-mentioned target symbol) of the first time unit.
示例性的,结合图8a,对S702的三种情况进行介绍:当S702包括S702a,但不包括S702b时,以图8a为例,第一UE执行的LBT过程可以包括LBT1或LBT4。当S702包括S702b,但不包括S702a时,以图8a为例,第一UE执行的LBT过程可以包括LBT2。当S702包括S702a和S702b时,以图8a为例,第一UE执行的LBT过程可以包括LBT3。Exemplarily, three cases of S702 are introduced with reference to FIG. 8a: when S702 includes S702a but does not include S702b, taking FIG. 8a as an example, the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT1 or LBT4. When S702 includes S702b but does not include S702a, taking FIG. 8a as an example, the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT2. When S702 includes S702a and S702b, taking FIG. 8a as an example, the LBT process performed by the first UE may include LBT3.
应理解,在本申请实施例的图8a中,以第一时间单元中的GAP符号为例,对第一子时间单元、第二子时间单元和LBT过程进行介绍,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限定。例如,第二子时间单元还可以位于非GAP符号中,具体可以参见目标符号的介绍,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that in Figure 8a of the embodiment of the present application, the GAP symbol in the first time unit is taken as an example to introduce the first sub-time unit, the second sub-time unit and the LBT process, which should not be interpreted as implementing the present application. Example limitations. For example, the second sub-time unit may also be located in a non-GAP symbol. For details, refer to the introduction of the target symbol, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,当第一UE执行Type1信道接入过程的情况下,至少一个子时间单元,包括第一UE进入随机回退状态后感知的子时间单元,或者,理解为,第一UE在推迟时间之外需要感知的子时间单元。当第一UE执行Type2信道接入过程的情况下,至少一个子时间单元中全部子时间单元的总时长,等于第一UE的感知时长。It should be noted that, when the first UE performs the Type1 channel access procedure, at least one sub-time unit includes the sub-time unit perceived by the first UE after entering the random back-off state, or it can be understood that the first UE is in the The sub-time unit that needs to be perceived outside the delay time. When the first UE performs the Type2 channel access procedure, the total duration of all sub-time units in at least one sub-time unit is equal to the perception duration of the first UE.
对于第一UE来说,第一UE确定第一参考信号的接收信号强度,以及至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度之后,第一UE还执行S703:For the first UE, after the first UE determines the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, the first UE also performs S703:
S703、第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定能否在第二时间单元进行传输。S703. The first UE determines whether transmission can be performed in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
其中,第二时间单元在S701的第一时间单元之后。以图8a为例,第一UE为UE3,UE3的预约资源在第二个时隙。相应的,第二时间单元包括第二个时隙。当第一时间单元包括第 一个时隙时,第二时间单元在第一时间单元之后。在本申请实施例中,第一时间单元与第二时间单元在时域上可以连续,如图8a所示,也可以不连续。Wherein, the second time unit is after the first time unit of S701. Taking FIG. 8a as an example, the first UE is UE3, and the reserved resource of UE3 is in the second time slot. Correspondingly, the second time unit includes the second time slot. When the first time unit includes the first time slot, the second time unit follows the first time unit. In the embodiment of the present application, the first time unit and the second time unit may be continuous in the time domain, as shown in FIG. 8a , or may not be continuous.
其中,第二时间单元在S702的至少一个子时间单元之后。示例性的,以图8a为例,第一UE仍为UE3,UE3的预约资源在第二个时隙中。相应的,第二时间单元包括第二个时隙。当至少一个子时间单元位于第一个时隙中时,第二时间单元在S702的至少一个子时间单元之后。Wherein, the second time unit is after at least one sub-time unit in S702. Exemplarily, taking FIG. 8a as an example, the first UE is still UE3, and the reserved resource of UE3 is in the second time slot. Correspondingly, the second time unit includes the second time slot. When at least one sub-time unit is located in the first time slot, the second time unit is after the at least one sub-time unit in S702.
在一些实施例中,如图10a所示,通过示例1和示例2,对S703的实现过程进行介绍:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10a, the implementation process of S703 is introduced through Example 1 and Example 2:
示例1,如图10a中示例1所在的虚线方框所示,S703包括S7031和S7032a,或者,S703包括S7031和S7032b。其中,S7031、S7032a和S7032b的介绍如下:Example 1, as shown in the dotted box of Example 1 in FIG. 10a, S703 includes S7031 and S7032a, or, S703 includes S7031 and S7032b. Among them, the introduction of S7031, S7032a and S7032b is as follows:
S7031、第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。S7031. The first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
其中,S7031中的至少一个子时间单元与S702中的至少一个子时间单元一致,此处不再赘述。Wherein, at least one sub-time unit in S7031 is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S702, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,当至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元为第一子时间单元时,即S702包括S702a,但不包括S702b时,针对至少一个子时间单元中的每个子时间单元,S7031的实现过程包括:Exemplarily, when each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the first sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702a but does not include S702b, for each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the implementation of S7031 The process includes:
第一UE根据第一强度确定第一子时间单元的忙闲状态,其中,第一强度为第一子时间单元的接收信号强度与第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值。示例性的,第一强度满足如下公式:The first UE determines the busy/idle state of the first sub-time unit according to the first strength, where the first strength is a difference between the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal. Exemplarily, the first intensity satisfies the following formula:
P3=P2-P1   公式(2)P3=P2-P1 formula (2)
其中,P3表示第一强度,P2表示第一子时间单元的接收信号强度,P1表示第一参考信号的接收信号强度。Wherein, P3 represents the first strength, P2 represents the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit, and P1 represents the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
示例性的,第一子时间单元的忙闲状态介绍如下:如果第一强度小于第一阈值,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为空闲状态;如果第一强度大于或等于第一阈值,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为繁忙状态。或者,如果第一强度小于或等于第一阈值,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为空闲状态;如果第一强度大于第一阈值,第一UE确定第一子时间单元为繁忙状态。Exemplarily, the busy state of the first sub-time unit is introduced as follows: if the first strength is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in the idle state; if the first strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE A UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state. Or, if the first strength is less than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state; if the first strength is greater than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state.
示例性的,当至少一个子时间单元既包括一定数量的第一子时间单元,又包括一定数量的第二子时间单元时,即S702包括S702a和S702b时,S7031的实现过程包括:针对至少一个子时间单元中的每个第一子时间单元,第一UE根据第一强度确定第一子时间单元的忙闲状态,其中,第一强度为第一子时间单元的接收信号强度与第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值,详见公式(2)的介绍,此处不再赘述。针对至少一个子时间单元中的每个第二子时间单元,第一UE根据第二强度确定第二子时间单元的忙闲状态,其中,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度,详见公式(3)的介绍。示例性的,第二强度满足如下公式:Exemplarily, when at least one sub-time unit includes both a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units, that is, when S702 includes S702a and S702b, the implementation process of S7031 includes: for at least one For each first sub-time unit in the sub-time unit, the first UE determines the busy state of the first sub-time unit according to the first strength, where the first strength is the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the first reference For the difference between the received signal strengths of the signals, refer to the introduction of formula (2) for details, and will not be repeated here. For each second sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the first UE determines the busy state of the second sub-time unit according to the second strength, where the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit, See the introduction of formula (3) for details. Exemplarily, the second intensity satisfies the following formula:
P3’=P2’     公式(3)P3'=P2' formula (3)
其中,P3’表示第二强度,P2’表示第二子时间单元的接收信号强度。Wherein, P3' represents the second strength, and P2' represents the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
示例性的,第二子时间单元的忙闲状态介绍如下:如果第二强度小于第一阈值,第二UE确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态;如果第二强度大于或等于第一阈值,第二UE确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态。或者,如果第二强度小于或等于第一阈值,第二UE确定第二子时间单元为空闲状态;如果第二强度大于第一阈值,第二UE确定第二子时间单元为繁忙状态。Exemplarily, the busy/idle state of the second sub-time unit is introduced as follows: if the second strength is less than the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in the idle state; if the second strength is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the second UE The second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state. Alternatively, if the second strength is less than or equal to the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state; if the second strength is greater than the first threshold, the second UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state.
在示例1中,对于第一UE来说,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态之后,第一UE执行S7032a或S7032b:In Example 1, for the first UE, after determining the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the first UE performs S7032a or S7032b:
S7032a、当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N1时,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。S7032a. When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N1, the first UE transmits in the second time unit.
其中,N1是第一UE随机生成的正整数。Wherein, N1 is a positive integer randomly generated by the first UE.
需要说明的是,在第一UE执行Type1信道接入过程时,至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量,可以理解为,第一UE进入随机回退状态之后感知的空闲子时间单元数量。此种情况下,N1满足如下公式:It should be noted that when the first UE performs the Type1 channel access procedure, the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit can be understood as the idle sub-time perceived by the first UE after entering the random back-off state number of units. In this case, N1 satisfies the following formula:
N1=N int   公式(4) N1=N int formula (4)
其中,N1表示第一UE进入随机回退状态之后感知的空闲子时间单元数量的最小值。N int表示第一UE进入随机回退状态之后,随机回退计数器的初始值,详见名词解释部分的介绍,此处不再赘述。 Wherein, N1 represents the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE after entering the random backoff state. N int represents the initial value of the random backoff counter after the first UE enters the random backoff state. For details, refer to the introduction in the terminology section, and will not be repeated here.
应理解,在S7032a中,处于空闲状态的子时间单元可以包括如下三种情况:It should be understood that in S7032a, the sub-time unit in the idle state may include the following three situations:
情况1,处于空闲状态的子时间单元,全部是第一子时间单元。In case 1, the sub-time units in the idle state are all the first sub-time units.
情况2,处于空闲状态的子时间单元,全部是第二子时间单元。In case 2, the sub-time units in the idle state are all the second sub-time units.
情况3,处于空闲状态的子时间单元,包括一定数量的第一子时间单元,以及一定数量的第二子时间单元。In case 3, the sub-time units in the idle state include a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units.
S7032b、当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量小于N1时,第一UE在第二时间单元不进行传输。S7032b. When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit is less than N1, the first UE does not transmit in the second time unit.
其中,S7032b中至少一个子时间单元,与S7032a中至少一个子时间单元一致,此处不再赘述。Wherein, at least one sub-time unit in S7032b is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S7032a, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,在第一UE执行S7032a时,可以理解为,第一UE按照Type1信道接入过程接入信道,以在第二时间单元进行传输。It should be understood that when the first UE executes S7032a, it can be understood that the first UE accesses the channel according to the Type1 channel access procedure, so as to perform transmission in the second time unit.
示例2,如图10a中示例2所在的虚线方框所示,S703包括S7031和S7033a,或者,S703包括S7031和S7033b。其中,S7031、S7033a和S7033b的介绍如下:Example 2, as shown in the dotted box of Example 2 in FIG. 10a, S703 includes S7031 and S7033a, or, S703 includes S7031 and S7033b. Among them, the introduction of S7031, S7033a and S7033b is as follows:
S7031、第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。S7031. The first UE determines the busy/idle state of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit.
示例性的,当至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元为第一子时间单元时,即S702包括S702a,但不包括S702b时,针对至少一个子时间单元中的每个子时间单元忙闲状态的确定,可以参见公式(2)的描述,此处不再赘述。Exemplarily, when each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the first sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702a but does not include S702b, for each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit the busy-idle status For determination, refer to the description of the formula (2), which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,当至少一个子时间单元中既包括一定数量的第一子时间单元,又包括一定数量的第二子时间单元时,即S702包括S702a,也包括S702b时,针对至少一个子时间单元中第一子时间单元忙闲状态的确定,可以参见公式(2)的描述,针对至少一个子时间单元中第二子时间单元忙闲状态的确定,可以参见公式(3)的描述,此处不再赘述。Exemplarily, when at least one sub-time unit includes both a certain number of first sub-time units and a certain number of second sub-time units, that is, when S702 includes both S702a and S702b, for at least one sub-time unit For the determination of the busy state of the first sub-time unit, refer to the description of formula (2), and for the determination of the busy state of the second sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, refer to the description of formula (3), where No longer.
示例性的,当至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元为第二子时间单元时,即S702包括S702b,但不包括S702a时,针对至少一个子时间单元中的每个子时间单元,S7031的实现过程包括:Exemplarily, when each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit is the second sub-time unit, that is, when S702 includes S702b but does not include S702a, for each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the implementation of S7031 The process includes:
当第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值时,第一UE根据第二强度确定第二子时间单元的忙闲状态,其中,第二强度为第二子时间单元的接收信号强度,具体可以参见公式 (3)的介绍,第二子时间单元的忙闲状态介绍可以参见示例1中第二子时间单元的介绍,此处不再赘述。When the received signal strength of the first reference signal is greater than the second threshold, the first UE determines the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit according to the second strength, where the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit, specifically Refer to the introduction of the formula (3). For the introduction of the busy/idle state of the second sub-time unit, refer to the introduction of the second sub-time unit in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,在第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值时,第一UE可以确定第二UE在第一时间单元上通过物理信道发送信息。并且,第一参考信号的接收强度较高,相应的,第一UE与第二UE之间在距离上比较近。第一UE与第二UE的资源感知结果相近,第一UE与第二UE可以共享信道。对于第一UE来说,第一UE可以采用Type2信道接入过程在第二时间单元上进行传输。It should be understood that when the received signal strength of the first reference signal is greater than the second threshold, the first UE may determine that the second UE sends information through the physical channel in the first time unit. Moreover, the receiving strength of the first reference signal is relatively high, and correspondingly, the distance between the first UE and the second UE is relatively short. The resource sensing results of the first UE and the second UE are similar, and the first UE and the second UE may share a channel. For the first UE, the first UE may use the Type2 channel access procedure to perform transmission in the second time unit.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,第一阈值与第二阈值是两个不同的阈值。在取值上,第一阈值的取值,与第二阈值的取值,可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。在本申请实施例中,第一阈值用于第一UE确定每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。对于第一UE来说,在同一LBT过程中,第一UE采用同一数值,作为第一阈值,来判断每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。在不同LBT过程中,第一UE采用的第一阈值的取值可以相同,也可以不同。示例性的,在LBT1过程中,第一UE采用阈值1作为第一阈值,来判断LBT1过程中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。在LBT2过程中,第一UE采用阈值2作为第一阈值,来判断LBT2过程中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态。其中,阈值1和阈值2均作为第一阈值,阈值1与阈值2的取值可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the first threshold and the second threshold are two different thresholds. In terms of values, the value of the first threshold and the value of the second threshold may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment of the present application, the first threshold is used for the first UE to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit. For the first UE, in the same LBT process, the first UE uses the same value as the first threshold to judge the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit. In different LBT processes, the value of the first threshold adopted by the first UE may be the same or different. Exemplarily, in the LBT1 process, the first UE uses threshold 1 as the first threshold to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in the LBT1 process. In the LBT2 process, the first UE uses threshold 2 as the first threshold to determine the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in the LBT2 process. Wherein, the threshold 1 and the threshold 2 both serve as the first threshold, and the values of the threshold 1 and the threshold 2 may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在示例2中,对于第一UE来说,确定至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态之后,第一UE执行S7033a或S7033b:In Example 2, for the first UE, after determining the busy/idle status of each sub-time unit in at least one sub-time unit, the first UE performs S7033a or S7033b:
S7033a、当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N2时,第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。S7033a. When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N2, the first UE transmits in the second time unit.
其中,N2为预定义的正整数。N2指示第一UE执行Type2信道接入过程中感知的空闲子时间单元数量的最小值。示例性的,N2满足如下公式:Wherein, N2 is a predefined positive integer. N2 indicates the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE during the Type2 channel access process. Exemplarily, N2 satisfies the following formula:
N2×T sl=t   公式(5) N2×T sl =t formula (5)
其中,N2表示第一UE执行Type2信道接入过程中感知到空闲子时间单元数量的最小值,T sl表示感知时隙的时长,t表示第一UE执行Type2信道接入过程中的感知时长,可以参见名词解释部分关于Type2信道接入过程的介绍。 Wherein, N2 represents the minimum value of the number of idle sub-time units perceived by the first UE during the Type2 channel access process, T sl represents the duration of the sensing time slot, and t represents the perception duration during the Type2 channel access process of the first UE, You can refer to the introduction of the Type2 channel access process in the explanation of terms.
应理解,在S7033a中,处于空闲状态的子时间单元可以包括如下情况:处于空闲状态的子时间单元,全部是第二子时间单元。It should be understood that, in S7033a, the sub-time units in the idle state may include the following situation: the sub-time units in the idle state are all the second sub-time units.
S7033b、当至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量小于N2时,第一UE在第二时间单元不进行传输。S7033b. When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in at least one sub-time unit is less than N2, the first UE does not transmit in the second time unit.
其中,S7033b中至少一个子时间单元,与S7033a中至少一个子时间单元一致,此处不再赘述。Wherein, at least one sub-time unit in S7033b is consistent with at least one sub-time unit in S7033a, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,在第一UE执行S7033a时,可以理解为,第一UE按照Type2信道接入过程接入信道,以在第二时间单元进行传输。It should be understood that when the first UE executes S7033a, it can be understood that the first UE accesses the channel according to the Type2 channel access procedure, so as to perform transmission in the second time unit.
需要说明的是,对于第一UE来说,第一UE具体采用哪种方式接入信道,在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,可以是由第二UE进行指示。在一些实施例中,如图10b所示,第一UE执行S703之前,还执行S709:It should be noted that, for the first UE, it may be indicated by the second UE which way the first UE uses to access the channel and perform signal transmission in the second time unit. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10b, before performing S703, the first UE further performs S709:
S709、第二UE向第一UE发送第二指示信息。相应的,第一UE接收来自第二UE的第二指示信息。S709. The second UE sends second indication information to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the second indication information from the second UE.
其中,作为第一种可能的实现方式,第二指示信息指示第一UE在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型。示例性的,信道接入类型包括Type1信道接入和Type2信道接入。对于第一UE来说,第一UE接收第二指示信息之后,基于第二指示信息指示的信道接入类型,确定在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型。例如,在信道接入类型是Type1信道接入的情况下,第一UE可以采用S703中示例1的介绍。在信道接入类型是Type2信道接入的情况下,第一UE可以采用S703中示例2的介绍。Wherein, as a first possible implementation manner, the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the first UE before the second time unit. Exemplarily, the channel access types include Type1 channel access and Type2 channel access. For the first UE, after receiving the second indication information, the first UE determines the channel access type before the second time unit based on the channel access type indicated by the second indication information. For example, in the case that the channel access type is Type1 channel access, the first UE may adopt the introduction of Example 1 in S703. In the case that the channel access type is Type2 channel access, the first UE may adopt the introduction of Example 2 in S703.
应理解,在第二指示信息的第一种可能的实现方式下,S709是可选的步骤,第一UE在已确定第二时间单元前的信道接入类型时,如网络设备已为第一UE配置了第二时间单元前的信道接入类型,第一UE可以不执行S709。反之,第一UE在未确定第二时间单元前的信道接入类型时,第一UE可以执行S709。It should be understood that in the first possible implementation of the second indication information, S709 is an optional step. When the first UE has determined the channel access type before the second time unit, if the network device is the first The UE configures the channel access type before the second time unit, and the first UE may not perform S709. Conversely, when the first UE has not determined the channel access type before the second time unit, the first UE may perform S709.
其中,作为第二种可能的实现方式,第二指示信息指示第一UE共享第二UE的COT。对于第一UE来说,第一UE接收第二指示信息之后,确定在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型为Type2信道接入,详见S703中示例2的介绍。反之,若第一UE未接收到第二指示信息,则第一UE确定在第二时间单元前的信道接入类型为Type1信道接入,详见S703中示例1的介绍。Wherein, as a second possible implementation manner, the second indication information indicates that the first UE shares the COT of the second UE. For the first UE, after receiving the second indication information, the first UE determines that the channel access type before the second time unit is Type2 channel access. For details, refer to the introduction of Example 2 in S703. On the contrary, if the first UE does not receive the second indication information, the first UE determines that the channel access type before the second time unit is Type1 channel access, see the introduction of Example 1 in S703 for details.
需要说明的是,对于第一UE来说,第一UE可以先执行S701,再执行S709,还可以先执行S709,再执行S701,还可以同时执行S701和S709,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that, for the first UE, the first UE may execute S701 first, and then execute S709, or execute S709 first, and then execute S701, or execute S701 and S709 at the same time, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. .
在一些实施例中,如图10c所示,通过示例3和示例4,对S703的实现过程进行介绍:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10c, the implementation process of S703 is introduced through Example 3 and Example 4:
示例3,如图10c中示例3所在的虚线方框所示,对于第一UE来说,第一UE执行S703之前,还执行S708a:Example 3, as shown in the dotted box of Example 3 in Figure 10c, for the first UE, before the first UE performs S703, it also performs S708a:
S708a、第一UE确定参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量。S708a. The first UE determines the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold.
示例性的,S708a中的时间单元介绍如下:Exemplarily, the time unit in S708a is introduced as follows:
S708a中的时间单元在第二时间单元之前,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第一时间单元。示例性的,以图10d为例,第二时间单元是第x+2个时隙,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第x+2个时隙之前的时隙。例如,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第x+1个时隙;或者,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第x+1个时隙,第x个时隙;或者,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第x+1个时隙,第x个时隙,第x-1个时隙;或者,S708a中的时间单元可以包括第x+1个时隙,第x个时隙,第x-1个时隙,第x-2个时隙。S708a中的时间单元还可以包括更多时隙,此处不再一一赘述。The time unit in S708a is before the second time unit, and the time unit in S708a may include the first time unit. Exemplarily, taking FIG. 10d as an example, the second time unit is the x+2th time slot, and the time unit in S708a may include the time slots before the x+2th time slot. For example, the time unit in S708a may include the x+1th time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include the x+1th time slot, the xth time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include the th x+1 time slot, xth time slot, x-1th time slot; or, the time unit in S708a may include x+1th time slot, xth time slot, x-1th time slot slot, the x-2th slot. The time unit in S708a may also include more time slots, which will not be described here one by one.
应理解,S708a中的参考信号可以是由一个UE发送,也可以由两个或多个UE发送。仍以图10d为例,UE1在第x+1个时隙发送参考信号,UE4在第x个时隙发送参考信号。当S708a中的时间单元包括第x+1个时隙时,S708a中的参考信号是UE1发送的。当S708a中的时间单元包括第x+1个时隙和第x个时隙时,S708a中的参考信号包括UE1发送的参考信号,以及UE4发送的参考信号。It should be understood that the reference signal in S708a may be sent by one UE, or may be sent by two or more UEs. Still taking Fig. 10d as an example, UE1 sends a reference signal in the x+1th time slot, and UE4 sends the reference signal in the xth time slot. When the time unit in S708a includes the x+1th time slot, the reference signal in S708a is sent by UE1. When the time unit in S708a includes the x+1th time slot and the xth time slot, the reference signal in S708a includes the reference signal sent by UE1 and the reference signal sent by UE4.
示例性的,第三阈值可以是RSRP阈值,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the third threshold may be an RSRP threshold, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在示例3中,如图10c中示例3所在的虚线方框所示,S703包括S7034a:In Example 3, as shown in the dotted box of Example 3 in Figure 10c, S703 includes S7034a:
S7034a、当参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量小于第四阈值时,第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定能否在第二时间单元进行传输。S7034a. When the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is less than the fourth threshold, the first UE determines whether the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit can be Two time units are transmitted.
其中,第一UE确定能否在第二时间单元进行传输的过程,可以参见S703中示例1和示例2的介绍,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the process of determining whether the first UE can perform transmission in the second time unit can refer to the introduction of Example 1 and Example 2 in S703, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,第四阈值的介绍如下:Exemplarily, the introduction of the fourth threshold is as follows:
作为第一种可能的实现方式,第四阈值是预配置的,或者,第四阈值是通信组配置的,或者,第四阈值是网络设备配置的。As a first possible implementation manner, the fourth threshold is preconfigured, or the fourth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fourth threshold is configured by the network device.
其中,预配置的第四阈值,可以理解为,第四阈值是第一UE在出厂时配置的参数。此种情况下,第一UE所在通信***中,如SL-U***,不同UE执行S7034a时均采用相同的第四阈值。示例性的,第一UE所在通信***,还包括第二UE、第三UE和第四UE。由于每个UE在出厂时配置的参数相同,所以,上述4个UE(如第一UE、第二UE、第三UE和第四UE)在执行S7034a时,采用相同的第四阈值。Wherein, the preconfigured fourth threshold may be understood as that the fourth threshold is a parameter configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory. In this case, in the communication system where the first UE is located, such as the SL-U system, different UEs use the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a. Exemplarily, the communication system where the first UE is located further includes a second UE, a third UE, and a fourth UE. Since each UE is configured with the same parameters when leaving the factory, the above four UEs (such as the first UE, the second UE, the third UE, and the fourth UE) use the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a.
其中,通信组配置的第四阈值,可以理解为,第一UE所在通信组配置的第四阈值。示例性的,对于某一通信组而言,该通信组的一个UE向同一通信组的其他UE发送指示信息X,其中,指示信息X指示第四阈值的大小。若第一UE属于上述通信组中的某一个UE,在接收到指示信息X之后,基于指示信息X即可确定第四阈值的大小。此种情况下,第一UE所在通信组中,不同UE执行S7034a时均采用相同的第四阈值。不同通信组的UE在执行S7034a时采用的第四阈值可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。示例性的,第一UE与第二UE之间相互通信,第一UE和第二UE所在的通信组记为通信组1。第三UE与第四UE之间相互通信,第三UE和第四UE所在的通信组记为通信组2。其中,第二UE在执行S7034a时采用的第四阈值,与第四UE在执行S7034a时采用的第四阈值,可以相同,也可以不同。Wherein, the fourth threshold configured by the communication group may be understood as the fourth threshold configured by the communication group where the first UE belongs. Exemplarily, for a certain communication group, a UE in the communication group sends indication information X to other UEs in the same communication group, where the indication information X indicates the magnitude of the fourth threshold. If the first UE belongs to a certain UE in the communication group, after receiving the indication information X, the size of the fourth threshold can be determined based on the indication information X. In this case, in the communication group where the first UE belongs, different UEs all adopt the same fourth threshold when performing S7034a. The fourth threshold used by UEs in different communication groups when performing S7034a may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the first UE and the second UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the first UE and the second UE belong is marked as communication group 1 . The third UE and the fourth UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the third UE and the fourth UE belong is denoted as communication group 2 . Wherein, the fourth threshold used by the second UE when performing S7034a may be the same as or different from the fourth threshold used by the fourth UE when performing S7034a.
其中,网络设备配置的第四阈值。示例性的,网络设备为第一UE配置的第四阈值,以使第一UE在执行S7034a时使用。示例性的,网络设备向第一UE发送指示信息Y,其中,指示信息Y指示第四阈值的大小。第一UE在接收到指示信息Y之后,基于指示信息Y即可确定第四阈值的大小。Wherein, the fourth threshold configured by the network device. Exemplarily, the network device configures the fourth threshold for the first UE, so that the first UE can use it when performing S7034a. Exemplarily, the network device sends indication information Y to the first UE, where the indication information Y indicates the magnitude of the fourth threshold. After receiving the indication information Y, the first UE can determine the size of the fourth threshold based on the indication information Y.
作为第二种可能的实现方式,第四阈值是基于第二UE的最大COT确定的。其中,第二UE的最大COT与第二UE发送的第一参考信号相关联。示例性的,对于一个UE来说,该UE的业务优先级越高,该UE的最大COT越大,意味着,该UE可以占用信道的时间越久。该UE的业务优先级可以通过参考信号的序列来体现,如表1所示:As a second possible implementation manner, the fourth threshold is determined based on the maximum COT of the second UE. Wherein, the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE. Exemplarily, for a UE, the higher the service priority of the UE is, the larger the maximum COT of the UE means, the longer the UE can occupy the channel. The service priority of the UE can be reflected by the sequence of the reference signal, as shown in Table 1:
表1Table 1
业务优先级business priority 参考信号的序列sequence of reference signals 最大COTMaximum COT
业务优先级1business priority 1 参考信号的序列1 Sequence 1 of the reference signal 3个时间单元3 time units
业务优先级2business priority 2 参考信号的序列2 Sequence 2 of the reference signal 6个时间单元6 time units
在表1中,业务优先级1与参考信号的序列1之间存在映射关系,业务优先级2与参考信号的序列2之间存在映射关系。对于第二UE来说,第二UE基于自身的业务优先级和表1,确定第一参考信号的序列。In Table 1, there is a mapping relationship between service priority 1 and sequence 1 of reference signals, and there is a mapping relationship between service priority 2 and sequence 2 of reference signals. For the second UE, the second UE determines the sequence of the first reference signal based on its own service priority and Table 1.
在表1中,对于一个UE来说,若该UE的业务优先级是业务优先级1,则该UE的最大COT可以等于3个时间单元的总时长,对应的,该UE最多可以在连续3个时间单元上进行信号传输。若该UE的业务优先级是业务优先级2,则该UE的最大COT可以等于6个时间 单元的总时长,对应的,该UE最多可以在连续6个时间单元上进行信号传输。In Table 1, for a UE, if the service priority of the UE is service priority 1, the maximum COT of the UE can be equal to the total duration of 3 time units. Signal transmission is carried out in time units. If the service priority of the UE is service priority 2, the maximum COT of the UE can be equal to the total duration of 6 time units, correspondingly, the UE can perform signal transmission in a maximum of 6 consecutive time units.
应理解,S708a中的参考信号可以是由一个UE发送,也可以由两个或多个UE发送,详见S708a的介绍。在S708a中的参考信号由两个或多个UE发送的情况下,第一UE可以按照第一预设条件或第二预设条件从两个或多个UE中选择一个UE,作为第二UE。It should be understood that the reference signal in S708a may be sent by one UE, or may be sent by two or more UEs, see the introduction of S708a for details. In the case that the reference signal in S708a is sent by two or more UEs, the first UE may select one UE from the two or more UEs according to the first preset condition or the second preset condition as the second UE .
其中,第一预设条件包括以下至少一项:Wherein, the first preset condition includes at least one of the following:
预设条件a1,第二UE的COT大于第三UE的COT。其中,第三UE与第一UE属于同一通信***。示例性的,以图10d为例,第一UE可以是UE3。第二UE可以是UE1,第三UE可以是UE4。或者,第二UE可以是UE4,第三UE可以是UE1。对应的,第一UE、第二UE和第三UE均属于SL-U***中的UE。The preset condition a1 is that the COT of the second UE is greater than the COT of the third UE. Wherein, the third UE and the first UE belong to the same communication system. Exemplarily, taking FIG. 10d as an example, the first UE may be UE3. The second UE may be UE1, and the third UE may be UE4. Alternatively, the second UE may be UE4, and the third UE may be UE1. Correspondingly, the first UE, the second UE and the third UE all belong to UEs in the SL-U system.
需要说明的是,预设条件a1中的COT可以替换为最大COT。此种情况下,预设条件a1,替换为,预设条件a11,即第二UE的最大COT大于第三UE的最大COT。应理解,S708a中的参考信号由两个或多个UE发送,不同UE具备的最大COT可以相同,也可以不同。在预设条件a11中,意味着,第一UE以最大COT为选择标准,从多个UE中选择最大COT较大的UE,作为第二UE。示例性的,如表2所示:It should be noted that the COT in the preset condition a1 can be replaced by the maximum COT. In this case, the preset condition a1 is replaced with the preset condition a11, that is, the maximum COT of the second UE is greater than the maximum COT of the third UE. It should be understood that the reference signal in S708a is sent by two or more UEs, and the maximum COTs of different UEs may be the same or different. The preset condition a11 means that the first UE uses the maximum COT as a selection criterion, and selects a UE with a larger maximum COT from multiple UEs as the second UE. Exemplary, as shown in Table 2:
表2Table 2
 the 最大COTMaximum COT 剩余COTremaining COT
UE1UE1 6个时间单元6 time units 1个时间单元1 time unit
UE4UE4 3个时间单元3 time units 2个时间单元2 time units
在表2中,当第一UE以最大COT为选择标准时,UE1的最大COT等于6个时间单元的总时长,UE4的最大COT等于3个时间单元的总时长,此种情况下,第一UE将UE1作为第二UE。In Table 2, when the first UE uses the maximum COT as the selection criterion, the maximum COT of UE1 is equal to the total duration of 6 time units, and the maximum COT of UE4 is equal to the total duration of 3 time units. In this case, the first UE Use UE1 as the second UE.
预设条件a1中的COT也可以替换为剩余COT。此种情况下,预设条件a1,替换为,预设条件a12,即第二UE的剩余COT大于第三UE的剩余COT。应理解,S708a中的参考信号由两个或多个UE发送,不同UE具备的剩余COT可以相同,也可以不同。在预设条件a12中,意味着,第一UE以剩余COT为选择标准,从多个UE中选择剩余COT较大的UE,作为第二UE。示例性的,在表2中,当第一UE以剩余COT为选择标准时,UE1的剩余COT等于1个时间单元的时长,UE4的剩余COT等于2个时间单元的时长,此种情况下,第一UE将UE4作为第二UE。The COT in the preset condition a1 can also be replaced with the remaining COT. In this case, the preset condition a1 is replaced with the preset condition a12, that is, the remaining COT of the second UE is greater than the remaining COT of the third UE. It should be understood that the reference signal in S708a is sent by two or more UEs, and the remaining COTs of different UEs may be the same or different. In the preset condition a12, it means that the first UE uses the remaining COT as a selection criterion, and selects a UE with a larger remaining COT from multiple UEs as the second UE. Exemplarily, in Table 2, when the first UE uses the remaining COT as the selection criterion, the remaining COT of UE1 is equal to the duration of 1 time unit, and the remaining COT of UE4 is equal to the duration of 2 time units. In this case, the first UE A UE uses UE4 as the second UE.
预设条件a2,第二UE的业务优先级低于第一UE的业务优先级。示例性的,第一UE能够获知自身的业务优先级。并且,第一UE基于上述表1和S708a中的参考信号,即可确定UE的业务优先级。例如,仍以表2为例,当UE1和UE4的业务优先级均低于第一UE的业务优先级时,第一UE可以再结合预设条件a1,从UE1和UE4中选择一个UE,作为第二UE。当UE1的业务优先级低于第一UE的业务优先级,UE4的业务优先级高于第一UE的业务优先级时,第一UE可以将UE1作为第二UE。当UE4的业务优先级低于第一UE的业务优先级,UE1的业务优先级高于第一UE的业务优先级时,第一UE可以将UE4作为第二UE。The preset condition a2 is that the service priority of the second UE is lower than the service priority of the first UE. Exemplarily, the first UE can learn its own service priority. In addition, the first UE can determine the service priority of the UE based on the above Table 1 and the reference signal in S708a. For example, still taking Table 2 as an example, when the service priorities of UE1 and UE4 are both lower than the service priority of the first UE, the first UE can combine the preset condition a1 to select a UE from UE1 and UE4 as Second UE. When the service priority of UE1 is lower than that of the first UE and the service priority of UE4 is higher than that of the first UE, the first UE may use UE1 as the second UE. When the service priority of UE4 is lower than that of the first UE and the service priority of UE1 is higher than that of the first UE, the first UE may use UE4 as the second UE.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,第一预设条件可以包括预设条件a1,不包括预设条件a2。此种情况下,第一UE以COT为选择标准,来选择第二UE。或者,第一预设条件还可以包括预设条件a1和预设条件a2。此种情况下,第一UE以COT和业务优先级为选择标准,来 选择第二UE。或者,第一预设条件还可以不包括预设条件a1,但包括预设条件a2。此种情况下,第一UE以业务优先级为选择标准,来选择第二UE。It should be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the first preset condition may include the preset condition a1, but not include the preset condition a2. In this case, the first UE selects the second UE by using the COT as a selection criterion. Alternatively, the first preset condition may also include a preset condition a1 and a preset condition a2. In this case, the first UE selects the second UE based on COT and service priority as selection criteria. Alternatively, the first preset condition may not include the preset condition a1, but include the preset condition a2. In this case, the first UE selects the second UE by using service priority as a selection criterion.
其中,第二预设条件包括:第二UE发送参考信号的时间单元与第二时间单元在时域上连续。示例性的,仍以图10d为例,第一UE可以是UE3。第二UE可以是UE1,第三UE可以是UE4。或者,第二UE可以是UE4,第三UE可以是UE1。对应的,第一UE、第二UE和第三UE均属于SL-U***中的UE。UE1在第x个时隙发送参考信号,UE4在第x-1个时隙发送参考信号,所以,第一UE基于第二预设条件,将UE1作为第二UE。Wherein, the second preset condition includes: the time unit in which the second UE sends the reference signal is continuous in the time domain with the second time unit. Exemplarily, still taking FIG. 10d as an example, the first UE may be UE3. The second UE may be UE1, and the third UE may be UE4. Alternatively, the second UE may be UE4, and the third UE may be UE1. Correspondingly, the first UE, the second UE and the third UE all belong to UEs in the SL-U system. UE1 sends the reference signal in the xth time slot, and UE4 sends the reference signal in the x-1th time slot. Therefore, the first UE uses UE1 as the second UE based on the second preset condition.
在示例3中,作为一种可能的实现方式,第一UE确定在第二时间单元进行传输的情况下,第一UE的COT介绍如下:第一UE的COT可以基于第四阈值来确定。例如,第一UE的COT满足如下公式:In Example 3, as a possible implementation manner, when the first UE determines to transmit in the second time unit, the COT of the first UE is introduced as follows: the COT of the first UE may be determined based on the fourth threshold. For example, the COT of the first UE satisfies the following formula:
COT1=(M-N)*T s  公式(6) COT1=(MN)*T s formula (6)
其中,COT1表示第一UE的COT,M表示第四阈值,N表示参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量,T s表示一个时隙的时长。 Wherein, COT1 represents the COT of the first UE, M represents the fourth threshold, N represents the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold, and T s represents the duration of one time slot.
针对S703中的示例3,再结合图10e和图10f进行介绍:For example 3 in S703, it will be introduced in conjunction with Figure 10e and Figure 10f:
例如,以图10e为例,第二UE的最大COT等于M个时隙的时长,可以理解为,第四阈值为M。第二UE已占用N个时隙,可以理解为,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量为N。剩余(M-N)个时隙未占用,可以理解为,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量小于第四阈值。第二时间单元可以是第N+1个时隙。若第一UE测量N个时隙中的参考信号之后,第一UE的随机回退计数器的数值是0,即第一UE确定能够在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,则第一UE接入信道,在第N+1个时隙上进行信号传输,并且,第一UE可以持续占用信道的时长最多可以是(M-N)个时隙的时长。For example, taking FIG. 10e as an example, the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots. It can be understood that the fourth threshold is M. The second UE has occupied N time slots. It can be understood that the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is N. The remaining (M-N) time slots are not occupied, it can be understood that the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is less than the fourth threshold. The second time unit may be the N+1th time slot. If the value of the random backoff counter of the first UE is 0 after the first UE measures the reference signals in N time slots, that is, the first UE determines that it can perform signal transmission in the second time unit, then the first UE accesses The channel performs signal transmission on the N+1th time slot, and the duration that the first UE can continuously occupy the channel may be at most (M-N) time slots.
再如,以图10f为例,第二UE的最大COT等于M个时隙的时长,第二UE已占用N个时隙,其中,M=N。仍以第四阈值为M,可以理解为,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量等于第四阈值。第二时间单元可以是第N+1个时隙。此种情况下,即使第一UE的随机回退计数器的数值是0,由于参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量等于第四阈值,为了限制第一UE所在通信***的UE持续占用信道的时长,第一UE在第N+1个时隙上不进行信号传输,即第一UE不接入信道,以提高异***的通信设备成功抢占传输资源的可能性。For another example, taking FIG. 10f as an example, the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots, and the second UE has occupied N time slots, where M=N. Still taking the fourth threshold as M, it can be understood that the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold. The second time unit may be the N+1th time slot. In this case, even if the value of the random backoff counter of the first UE is 0, since the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold, in order to limit the continuous occupation of the UE in the communication system where the first UE is located For the duration of the channel, the first UE does not perform signal transmission on the N+1 time slot, that is, the first UE does not access the channel, so as to improve the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully seize transmission resources.
应理解,在本申请实施例的示例3中,参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量在时域上是连续的。意味着,在第二时间单元之前,第一UE所在通信***的其他UE连续占用传输资源。It should be understood that, in Example 3 of the embodiment of the present application, the number of time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is continuous in the time domain. It means that before the second time unit, other UEs in the communication system where the first UE is located continuously occupy the transmission resources.
需要说明的是,对于某一个UE而言,COT表征的是,该UE可以占用信道的时长。COT的单位可以是us或者ms或者s等。某一个UE的COT,可以等于一定数量的连续的时隙总时长,也可以等于某一时隙的一部分时长,还可以等于一定数量的连续时隙的总长度,与某一时隙的一部分时长之和。在本申请实施例中,以“COT等于一定数量的连续的时隙时长”为例,进行介绍,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限定。It should be noted that, for a certain UE, the COT represents the duration that the UE can occupy the channel. The unit of COT can be us or ms or s, etc. The COT of a certain UE can be equal to the total length of a certain number of continuous time slots, or a part of the time length of a certain time slot, or the sum of the total length of a certain number of continuous time slots and a part of the time length of a certain time slot . In the embodiment of the present application, "COT is equal to a certain number of continuous time slot durations" is used as an example for introduction, which should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
示例4,如图10c中示例4所在的虚线方框所示,对于第一UE来说,第一UE执行S703之前,还执行S708b:Example 4, as shown in the dotted box of Example 4 in Figure 10c, for the first UE, before performing S703, the first UE also performs S708b:
S708b、第二UE向第一UE发送第一指示信息。相应的,第一UE接收来自第二UE的 第一指示信息。S708b. The second UE sends the first indication information to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the first indication information from the second UE.
其中,第一指示信息指示第二UE的最大COT和剩余COT中的至少一项。示例性的,仍以表2为例,在第二UE是UE1的情况下,第一指示信息指示第二UE的最大COT等于6个时间单元的时长,和/或,第一指示信息指示第二UE的剩余COT等于1个时间单元的时长。Wherein, the first indication information indicates at least one of the maximum COT and the remaining COT of the second UE. Exemplarily, still taking Table 2 as an example, in the case that the second UE is UE1, the first indication information indicates that the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of 6 time units, and/or, the first indication information indicates that the second UE The remaining COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of 1 time unit.
应理解,以最大COT为例,第一指示信息可以直接指示第二UE的最大COT,也可以间接指示第二UE的最大COT,本申请实施例对此不作限定。类似的,以剩余COT为例,第一指示信息可以直接指示第二UE的剩余COT,也可以间接指示第二UE的剩余COT,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that, taking the maximum COT as an example, the first indication information may directly indicate the maximum COT of the second UE, or may indirectly indicate the maximum COT of the second UE, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Similarly, taking the remaining COT as an example, the first indication information may directly indicate the remaining COT of the second UE, or may indirectly indicate the remaining COT of the second UE, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在示例4中,S703包括S7034b:In Example 4, S703 includes S7034b:
S7034b、第一UE根据第一参考信号的接收信号强度和至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,以及第一指示信息,确定能否在第二时间单元进行传输。S7034b. The first UE determines whether transmission can be performed in the second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal, the received signal strength of at least one sub-time unit, and the first indication information.
例如,在第一指示信息指示第二UE的最大COT的情况下,第一UE可以基于第一参考信号所在的第一时间单元数量、第一时间单元位置,以及第二UE的最大COT,确定第二时间单元能否在第二UE的剩余COT中,若是,则第一UE执行示例1或示例2的信道接入过程,以确定能否在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,若否,则第一UE不在第二时间单元上进行信号传输。For example, when the first indication information indicates the maximum COT of the second UE, the first UE may determine based on the number of first time units where the first reference signal is located, the position of the first time unit, and the maximum COT of the second UE Whether the second time unit is in the remaining COT of the second UE, if yes, the first UE performs the channel access procedure of example 1 or example 2, to determine whether signal transmission can be performed on the second time unit, if not, Then the first UE does not perform signal transmission in the second time unit.
再如,在第一指示信息指示第二UE的剩余COT的情况下,第一UE可以基于第一参考信号所在的第一时间单元数量、第一时间单元位置,以及第二UE的剩余COT,确定第二时间单元能否在第二UE的剩余COT中,若是,则第一UE执行示例1或示例2的信道接入过程,以确定能否在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,若否,则第一UE不在第二时间单元上进行信号传输。For another example, when the first indication information indicates the remaining COT of the second UE, the first UE may, based on the number of first time units where the first reference signal is located, the position of the first time unit, and the remaining COT of the second UE, Determine whether the second time unit can be in the remaining COT of the second UE, if yes, then the first UE performs the channel access process of example 1 or example 2, to determine whether signal transmission can be performed on the second time unit, if no , the first UE does not perform signal transmission in the second time unit.
针对S703中的示例4,仍结合图10e和图10f进行介绍:For example 4 in S703, the introduction is still combined with Fig. 10e and Fig. 10f:
例如,以图10e为例,仍以第二UE的最大COT等于M个时隙的时长。第二UE已占用N个时隙,可以理解为,第一时间单元数量为N。剩余(M-N)个时隙未占用,可以理解为,第二UE的剩余COT等于(M-N)个时隙的时长。第二时间单元可以是第N+1个时隙,属于第二UE的剩余(M-N)个时隙中的一个时隙。若第一UE测量N个时隙中的参考信号之后,第一UE的随机回退计数器的数值是0,即第一UE确定能够在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,则第一UE接入信道,在第N+1个时隙上进行信号传输,并且,第一UE可以持续占用信道的时长最多可以是(M-N)个时隙的时长。For example, taking FIG. 10e as an example, it is still assumed that the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots. The second UE has occupied N time slots, which can be understood as that the number of first time units is N. The remaining (M-N) time slots are not occupied, it can be understood that the remaining COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of the (M-N) time slots. The second time unit may be the N+1th time slot, which belongs to one of the remaining (M-N) time slots of the second UE. If the value of the random backoff counter of the first UE is 0 after the first UE measures the reference signals in N time slots, that is, the first UE determines that it can perform signal transmission in the second time unit, then the first UE accesses The channel performs signal transmission on the N+1th time slot, and the duration that the first UE can continuously occupy the channel may be at most (M-N) time slots.
再如,以图10f为例,第二UE的最大COT等于M个时隙的时长,第二UE已占用N个时隙,其中,M=N,即第二UE的剩余COT为零。第二时间单元可以是第N+1个时隙,不属于第二UE的剩余COT。此种情况下,即使第一UE的随机回退计数器的数值是0,由于第二时间单元不属于第二UE的剩余COT,为了限制第一UE所在通信***的UE持续占用信道的时长,第一UE在第N+1个时隙上不进行信号传输,即第一UE不接入信道,以提高异***的通信设备成功抢占传输资源的可能性。For another example, taking Figure 10f as an example, the maximum COT of the second UE is equal to the duration of M time slots, and the second UE has occupied N time slots, where M=N, that is, the remaining COT of the second UE is zero. The second time unit may be the N+1th time slot, which does not belong to the remaining COT of the second UE. In this case, even if the value of the random backoff counter of the first UE is 0, since the second time unit does not belong to the remaining COT of the second UE, in order to limit the duration that the UE of the communication system where the first UE is located continuously occupies the channel, the first UE A UE does not perform signal transmission on the N+1 time slot, that is, the first UE does not access the channel, so as to increase the possibility that communication devices of different systems successfully seize transmission resources.
应理解,在示例4中,承载第一参考信号的第一时间单元与第二时间单元在时域上可以相邻,也可以不相邻,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that, in Example 4, the first time unit carrying the first reference signal and the second time unit may or may not be adjacent in the time domain, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
下面,通过第一种实现方式和第二种实现方式,对S701中的第一参考信号进行介绍:Below, the first reference signal in S701 is introduced through the first implementation and the second implementation:
作为第一种可能的实现方式,第一参考信号包括以下其中一项:As a first possible implementation manner, the first reference signal includes one of the following:
第一项,预配置的序列。其中,预配置的序列可以是指,该序列是第一UE在出厂时配置的序列。此种情况下,第一UE所在通信***中,如SL-U***,不同UE发送参考信号时均采用相同的序列。示例性的,第一UE所在通信***,还包括第二UE、第三UE和第四UE。由于每个UE在出厂时配置的参数相同,所以,上述4个UE(如第一UE、第二UE、第三UE和第四UE)在发送参考信号时,采用相同的序列。The first item, the preconfigured sequence. Wherein, the pre-configured sequence may refer to that the sequence is configured by the first UE when it leaves the factory. In this case, in the communication system where the first UE is located, such as the SL-U system, different UEs use the same sequence when sending reference signals. Exemplarily, the communication system where the first UE is located further includes a second UE, a third UE, and a fourth UE. Since each UE is configured with the same parameters when leaving the factory, the above four UEs (such as the first UE, the second UE, the third UE, and the fourth UE) adopt the same sequence when sending reference signals.
第二项,通信组配置的序列。其中,通信组配置的序列可以是指,第一UE所在通信组配置的序列。示例性的,对于某一通信组而言,该通信组的一个UE向同一通信组的其他UE发送指示信息M,其中,指示信息M指示参考信号的序列。若第二UE属于上述通信组中的某一个UE,在接收到指示信息M之后,基于指示信息M即可确定第一参考信号的序列。此种情况下,第一UE所在通信组中,不同UE发送参考信号时均采用相同的序列。不同通信组的UE在发送参考信号时采用的序列可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。示例性的,第一UE与第二UE之间相互通信,第一UE和第二UE所在的通信组记为通信组1。第三UE与第四UE之间相互通信,第三UE和第四UE所在的通信组记为通信组2。其中,第二UE在发送参考信号时采用的序列,与第四UE在发送参考信号时采用的序列,可以相同,也可以不同。The second item, the sequence of communication group configurations. The sequence of communication group configurations may refer to the sequence of communication group configurations where the first UE belongs. Exemplarily, for a certain communication group, a UE in the communication group sends indication information M to other UEs in the same communication group, where the indication information M indicates the sequence of the reference signal. If the second UE belongs to a certain UE in the communication group, after receiving the indication information M, the sequence of the first reference signal can be determined based on the indication information M. In this case, in the communication group where the first UE belongs, different UEs all use the same sequence when sending the reference signal. The sequences used by UEs in different communication groups when sending reference signals may be the same or different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the first UE and the second UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the first UE and the second UE belong is marked as communication group 1 . The third UE and the fourth UE communicate with each other, and the communication group in which the third UE and the fourth UE belong is denoted as communication group 2 . Wherein, the sequence used by the second UE when sending the reference signal may be the same as or different from the sequence used by the fourth UE when sending the reference signal.
第三项,网络设备配置的序列。示例性的,网络设备为第二UE配置的序列,以使第二UE在发送第一参考信号时使用。示例性的,网络设备向第一UE发送指示信息N,其中,指示信息N指示参考信号的序列。第二UE在接收到指示信息N之后,基于指示信息N即可确定第一参考信号的序列。The third item is the sequence of network device configuration. Exemplarily, the network device configures the sequence for the second UE, so that the second UE uses it when sending the first reference signal. Exemplarily, the network device sends indication information N to the first UE, where the indication information N indicates the sequence of the reference signal. After receiving the indication information N, the second UE can determine the sequence of the first reference signal based on the indication information N.
应理解,上述三项中的序列,可以包括时域序列,也可以包括频域序列,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that the sequences in the above three items may include time domain sequences or frequency domain sequences, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,通过示例1和示例2,对S701中的第一参考信号,进行详细介绍:In the first possible implementation manner, the first reference signal in S701 is introduced in detail through Example 1 and Example 2:
示例1,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号之后。Example 1, the first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
应理解,对于一个时间单元来说,通常首个符号为自动增益控制(automatic gain control,AGC)符号。It should be understood that, for a time unit, usually the first symbol is an automatic gain control (AGC) symbol.
如图11a所示,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的AGC符号之后,如AGC符号之后的首个符号。在示例1中,第一参考信号的序列可以包括频域序列,也可以包括时域序列。As shown in Fig. 11a, the first reference signal is located after the AGC symbol of the first time unit, such as the first symbol after the AGC symbol. In Example 1, the sequence of the first reference signal may include a frequency domain sequence or a time domain sequence.
在第一参考信号包括时域序列的情况下,第一参考信号占用全带宽。其中,全带宽可以是20MHz带宽。对应的,第一参考信号可以占用全带宽中的所有子信道。In case the first reference signal comprises a time domain sequence, the first reference signal occupies the full bandwidth. Wherein, the full bandwidth may be a 20 MHz bandwidth. Correspondingly, the first reference signal may occupy all sub-channels in the full bandwidth.
在第一参考信号包括频域序列的情况下,第一参考信号占用全带宽,具体可以参见示例1中时域序列的介绍,此处不再赘述。或者,第一参考信号占用的子信道与物理信道占用的子信道相同。示例性的,将物理信道占用的子信道,记为第一子信道。其中,第一子信道是全带宽中的部分子信道,如第一子信道可以是一个或多个子信道。物理信道包括PSSCH和PSCCH中的至少一项。下面,以PSSCH为例,对第一子信道进行介绍。参见图11b,PSSCH占据第j个子信道。其中,第j个子信道即为上述第一子信道。以每个子信道包括N个PRB为例,PSSCH占据N个PRB。相应的,第一参考信号也就占用第j个子信道。In the case that the first reference signal includes a frequency-domain sequence, the first reference signal occupies the full bandwidth. For details, refer to the introduction of the time-domain sequence in Example 1, which will not be repeated here. Or, the subchannel occupied by the first reference signal is the same as the subchannel occupied by the physical channel. Exemplarily, the subchannel occupied by the physical channel is recorded as the first subchannel. Wherein, the first subchannel is a partial subchannel in the full bandwidth, for example, the first subchannel may be one or more subchannels. Physical channels include at least one of PSSCH and PSCCH. In the following, the PSSCH is taken as an example to introduce the first subchannel. Referring to Fig. 11b, the PSSCH occupies the jth subchannel. Wherein, the j-th sub-channel is the above-mentioned first sub-channel. Taking each subchannel including N PRBs as an example, the PSSCH occupies N PRBs. Correspondingly, the first reference signal also occupies the jth subchannel.
应理解,第二UE在每个符号上的信号发送强度可以相同。意味着,AGC符号上的信号发送强度,与第一参考信号的信号发送强度相同。It should be understood that the signal transmission strength of the second UE on each symbol may be the same. This means that the signal transmission strength on the AGC symbol is the same as the signal transmission strength of the first reference signal.
可选的,如图11c所示,对于第二UE而言,第二UE还执行S704:Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11c, for the second UE, the second UE also performs S704:
S704、第二UE在第一时间单元上发送第二参考信号。相应的,第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第二参考信号。S704. The second UE sends the second reference signal in the first time unit. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the second reference signal from the second UE in the first time unit.
其中,第二参考信号与第一参考信号相同,第二参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号上。可以理解为,第一时间单元的第一个符号发送内容与第一时间单元的第二个符号发送内容相同。其中,第一时间单元的第一个符号承载的第二参考信号,用于接收到第二参考信号的UE进行AGC。Wherein, the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal is located on the first symbol of the first time unit. It can be understood that the first symbol transmission content of the first time unit is the same as the second symbol transmission content of the first time unit. Wherein, the second reference signal carried by the first symbol of the first time unit is used for the UE receiving the second reference signal to perform AGC.
对于第一UE来说,第一UE接收第二参考信号之后,执行S705:For the first UE, after the first UE receives the second reference signal, perform S705:
S705、第一UE根据第一时间单元的第一个符号上的接收信号,进行AGC。S705. The first UE performs AGC according to the received signal on the first symbol of the first time unit.
应理解,第一UE在第一时间单元的第一个符号上的接收信号,至少包括第二参考信号。当其他UE,如第三UE在第一时间单元上也发送信号的情况下,第一UE在第一时间单元的第一个符号上的接收信号,也包括第三UE发送的信号。It should be understood that the signal received by the first UE on the first symbol of the first time unit includes at least the second reference signal. When other UEs, such as the third UE, also send signals in the first time unit, the signal received by the first UE in the first symbol of the first time unit also includes the signal sent by the third UE.
示例性的,第一UE根据第一时间单元的第一个符号的接收信号的接收信号强度,调整自身接收机的放大系数,以保证自身能够正确接收其他UE的信号。Exemplarily, the first UE adjusts the amplification factor of its own receiver according to the received signal strength of the received signal of the first symbol of the first time unit, so as to ensure that it can correctly receive signals of other UEs.
示例2,第一参考信号位于第一时间单元的第一个符号。Example 2, the first reference signal is located in the first symbol of the first time unit.
如图12a所示,第一参考信号位于AGC符号上。在示例2中,第一参考信号的序列可以包括频域序列,也可以包括时域序列。As shown in Figure 12a, the first reference signal is located on the AGC symbols. In Example 2, the sequence of the first reference signal may include a frequency domain sequence, or may include a time domain sequence.
在示例2中,当第一参考信号包括时域序列时,第一时间单元的第一个符号承载K个重复的时域序列。K为正整数,K≥2。其中,K个重复的时域序列中的第一部分序列用于第一UE确定第一参考信号的接收信号强度。K个重复的时域序列中的第二部分序列用于第一UE进行AGC,对应的,第一UE根据第二部分序列进行AGC,以调整自身接收机的放大系数,从而保证自身能够正确接收其他UE的信号。In Example 2, when the first reference signal includes time domain sequences, the first symbol of the first time unit carries K repeated time domain sequences. K is a positive integer, K≥2. Wherein, the first partial sequence in the K repeated time domain sequences is used for the first UE to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal. The second part of the K repeated time domain sequences is used for AGC by the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE performs AGC according to the second part of the sequence to adjust the amplification factor of its own receiver, so as to ensure that it can correctly receive Signals from other UEs.
其中,第一部分序列与第二部分序列不同。如图12a所示,第一部分序列在第二部分序列之后。第一部分序列和第二部分序列的介绍如下:Wherein, the first partial sequence is different from the second partial sequence. As shown in Figure 12a, the first partial sequence follows the second partial sequence. The introduction of the first part sequence and the second part sequence is as follows:
按照时域序列粒度来说,第一部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K1个时域序列,其中,K1为小于K的正整数。第二部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K2个时域序列,其中,K2为小于K的正整数。According to the time-domain sequence granularity, the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, where K1 is a positive integer smaller than K. The second partial sequence includes K2 time domain sequences among the K repeated time domain sequences, where K2 is a positive integer smaller than K.
或者,按照元素粒度来说,分两种情况进行介绍:Or, according to the granularity of elements, it is introduced in two cases:
情况1,第一部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K1个时域序列,其中,K1为小于K的正整数。第二部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K2个时域序列,其中,K2为小于K的正整数。In case 1, the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, where K1 is a positive integer smaller than K. The second partial sequence includes K2 time domain sequences among the K repeated time domain sequences, where K2 is a positive integer smaller than K.
情况2,第一部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K1个时域序列,以及第一时域序列中的一部分序列(或者,描述为,第一时域序列中的一部分元素),其中,K1为小于K的正整数。第二部分序列包括K个重复的时域序列中的K2个时域序列,以及第一时域序列中的另一部分序列(或者,描述为,第一时域序列中的另一部分元素)。其中,K2为小于K的正整数。K个重复的时域序列包括上述K1个时域序列、K2个时域序列和第一时域序列。 Case 2, the first partial sequence includes K1 time-domain sequences in the K repeated time-domain sequences, and a part of the sequence in the first time-domain sequence (or, described as, a part of elements in the first time-domain sequence), where , K1 is a positive integer less than K. The second partial sequence includes K2 time-domain sequences among the K repeated time-domain sequences, and another partial sequence (or, described as, another part of elements in the first time-domain sequence) of the first time-domain sequence. Wherein, K2 is a positive integer smaller than K. The K repeated time-domain sequences include the aforementioned K1 time-domain sequences, K2 time-domain sequences and the first time-domain sequence.
在第一参考信号包括时域序列的情况下,第一参考信号的带宽可以参见示例1中时域序列的介绍,此处不再赘述。In the case that the first reference signal includes a time-domain sequence, the bandwidth of the first reference signal may refer to the introduction of the time-domain sequence in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
在示例2中,当第一参考信号包括频域序列时,第一参考信号在频域上的每L个子频域 单元中占据1个子频域单元。In Example 2, when the first reference signal includes a frequency domain sequence, the first reference signal occupies 1 sub-frequency domain unit in every L sub-frequency domain units in the frequency domain.
示例性的,可以理解为,第一参考信号的频域序列中相邻的两个元素,在频域上间隔L-1个子频域单元,L为正整数,L≥1。其中,子频域单元可以是RE、PRB、子信道等,在本申请实施例中,以子频域单元是RE为例,进行介绍。也就是说,第二UE以频域L梳齿的方式发送第一参考信号。参见图12b,图12b示出了频域2梳齿的资源映射示意图,对应的,第一参考信号的频域序列中的相邻的两个元素,在频域上间隔2个子频域单元。将第一参考信号的频域序列变换到时域之后,得到第一参考信号的时域序列。其中,第一参考信号的时域序列是两个重复的时域序列,如图12b所示。Exemplarily, it can be understood that two adjacent elements in the frequency domain sequence of the first reference signal are separated by L-1 sub-frequency domain units in the frequency domain, where L is a positive integer, and L≥1. Wherein, the sub-frequency domain unit may be RE, PRB, sub-channel, etc. In this embodiment of the application, the sub-frequency domain unit is RE as an example for introduction. That is to say, the second UE sends the first reference signal in a manner of L comb teeth in the frequency domain. Referring to FIG. 12b, FIG. 12b shows a schematic diagram of resource mapping of 2 combs in the frequency domain. Correspondingly, two adjacent elements in the frequency domain sequence of the first reference signal are separated by 2 sub-frequency domain units in the frequency domain. After transforming the frequency domain sequence of the first reference signal into the time domain, the time domain sequence of the first reference signal is obtained. Wherein, the time domain sequence of the first reference signal is two repeated time domain sequences, as shown in Fig. 12b.
在第一参考信号包括频域序列的情况下,第一参考信号的带宽可以参见示例1中频域序列的介绍,此处不再赘述。In the case that the first reference signal includes a frequency-domain sequence, the bandwidth of the first reference signal can refer to the introduction of the frequency-domain sequence in Example 1, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,在示例2中,作为一种可能的实现方式,第二UE在一个符号上发送第一参考信号的发送信号强度,满足如下公式:It should be understood that in Example 2, as a possible implementation, the second UE sends the signal strength of the first reference signal in one symbol, which satisfies the following formula:
P RS=X*P PS    公式(7) P RS =X*P PS formula (7)
其中,P RS表示单个符号上第一参考信号的发送信号强度,P PS表示单个符号上物理信道所承载信息的发送信号强度。X表示倍数,X>0。例如,X的取值为1,或者,X的取值为大于1的数值。 Wherein, P RS represents the transmitted signal strength of the first reference signal on a single symbol, and P PS represents the transmitted signal strength of the information carried by the physical channel on a single symbol. X represents a multiple, X>0. For example, the value of X is 1, or the value of X is a value greater than 1.
需要说明的是,在示例2中,一个时隙中的第二个符号,即可用于发送物理信道所承载的信息,以提高资源利用率。It should be noted that, in Example 2, the second symbol in a time slot can be used to send information carried by the physical channel, so as to improve resource utilization.
对于第一UE来说,如果第一参考信号的序列为时域序列,则第一UE可以直接将接收信号(即第一UE接收到的第一参考信号)与本地存储的第一参考信号的时域序列做时域相关操作,来计算第一参考信号的接收信号强度。如果第一参考信号的序列为频域序列,则第一UE首先将接收信号(即第一UE接收到的第一参考信号)从时域变换到频域,若变换到频域的第一参考信号占据所有子信道,则在所有子信道上做频域相关操作,来计算第一参考信号的接收信号强度,若变换到频域的第一参考信号占据部分子信道(如第一子信道),则在相应子信道上做频域相关操作,来计算第一参考信号的接收信号强度。对于第一UE来说,确定第一参考信号的接收信号强度的过程,可以参见相关技术,此处不再赘述。For the first UE, if the sequence of the first reference signal is a time-domain sequence, the first UE may directly combine the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) with the locally stored first reference signal The time-domain sequence performs a time-domain correlation operation to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal. If the sequence of the first reference signal is a sequence in the frequency domain, the first UE first transforms the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) from the time domain to the frequency domain. If the signal occupies all sub-channels, frequency-domain correlation operations are performed on all sub-channels to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal. If the first reference signal converted to the frequency domain occupies part of the sub-channels (such as the first sub-channel) , then perform a frequency domain correlation operation on the corresponding sub-channel to calculate the received signal strength of the first reference signal. For the process of determining the received signal strength of the first reference signal for the first UE, reference may be made to related technologies, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,对于第一UE来说,第一参考信号的接收信号强度,是指时域上的接收信号强度。在公式(7)的情况下,第一UE将接收信号(即第一UE接收到的第一参考信号)从时域变换到频域,经过频域相关操作之后,计算得到的第一参考信号的接收信号强度,满足如下公式:It should be understood that, for the first UE, the received signal strength of the first reference signal refers to the received signal strength in the time domain. In the case of formula (7), the first UE transforms the received signal (that is, the first reference signal received by the first UE) from the time domain to the frequency domain, and after the frequency domain correlation operation, the calculated first reference signal The received signal strength satisfies the following formula:
P1=P RS/X    公式(8) P1=P RS /X formula (8)
其中,P1表示第一参考信号的接收信号强度,P RS表示单个符号上第一参考信号的发送信号强度,X表示倍数,X可以参见公式(7)的介绍,此处不再赘述。 Wherein, P1 represents the received signal strength of the first reference signal, P RS represents the transmitted signal strength of the first reference signal on a single symbol, X represents a multiple, and X can refer to the introduction of formula (7), and will not be repeated here.
作为第二种可能的实现方式,第一参考信号包括以下至少一项:As a second possible implementation manner, the first reference signal includes at least one of the following:
第一项,PSCCH DMRS。示例性的,如图13所示,在频域上,PSCCH占用10个PRB,在时域上,PSCCH占用一个时隙的第二个符号至第四个符号。PSCCH DMRS占用10个PRB中的部分PRB。The first item, PSCCH DMRS. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 13 , in the frequency domain, the PSCCH occupies 10 PRBs, and in the time domain, the PSCCH occupies the second to fourth symbols of a time slot. The PSCCH DMRS occupies part of the 10 PRBs.
第二项,PSSCH DMRS。示例性的,如图13所示,在频域上,PSSCH占用全带宽,在时域上,PSSCH占用一个时隙的第二个符号至第四个符号,第六个符号至第十个符号,第十 二个符号至第十三个符号。PSCCH DMRS占用一个时隙的第五个符号和第十一个符号。The second item, PSSCH DMRS. Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 13, in the frequency domain, the PSSCH occupies the full bandwidth, and in the time domain, the PSSCH occupies the second to fourth symbols of a time slot, and the sixth to tenth symbols , the twelfth symbol to the thirteenth symbol. PSCCH DMRS occupies the fifth symbol and the eleventh symbol of a slot.
需要说明的是,PSCCH DMRS和PSSCH DMRS可以有多种配置的方式,图13是示例性地给出了一种配置方式,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限定。It should be noted that the PSCCH DMRS and the PSSCH DMRS can be configured in multiple ways, and FIG. 13 is an example of a configuration mode, which should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
在一些实施例中,第一UE所在通信***的UE,在发送PSCCH之前,先发送参考信号,基于此,接收到参考信号的UE还能够降低自身PSCCH的盲检功耗。示例性的,如图14所示,以第一UE作为接收到参考信号的UE为例,第一UE还执行S706和S707:In some embodiments, the UE in the communication system where the first UE is located sends a reference signal before sending the PSCCH. Based on this, the UE that receives the reference signal can also reduce the blind detection power consumption of its own PSCCH. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 14, taking the first UE as the UE receiving the reference signal as an example, the first UE also performs S706 and S707:
S706、第三UE在第四时间单元上发送第三参考信号。相应的,第一UE在第四时间单元上接收来自第三UE的第三参考信号。S706. The third UE sends the third reference signal in the fourth time unit. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the third reference signal from the third UE in the fourth time unit.
其中,第三UE与第一UE属于同一通信***,如SL-U***。第三UE与第二UE可以是同一UE,也可以是不同的UE,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Wherein, the third UE and the first UE belong to the same communication system, such as the SL-U system. The third UE and the second UE may be the same UE or different UEs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
其中,第四时间单元,可以参见第一时间单元的介绍,此处不再赘述。第四时间单元与第一时间单元可以是同一时间单元,也可以是不同的时间单元,本申请实施例对此不作限定。应理解,当第四时间单元是第一时间单元时,第三参考信号是第一参考信号,此种情况下,第二时间单元可以属于网络设备为第一UE配置的资源。当第四时间单元与第一时间单元不同时,第三参考信号与第一参考信号不同。此种情况下,第二时间单元可以属于网络设备为第一UE配置的资源,或者,当第四时间单元在第二时间单元之前时,第二时间单元也可以是第一UE基于第四时间单元中的PSCCH进行资源选择所预约的资源。For the fourth time unit, refer to the introduction of the first time unit, which will not be repeated here. The fourth time unit and the first time unit may be the same time unit, or may be different time units, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that when the fourth time unit is the first time unit, the third reference signal is the first reference signal. In this case, the second time unit may belong to resources configured by the network device for the first UE. When the fourth time unit is different from the first time unit, the third reference signal is different from the first reference signal. In this case, the second time unit may belong to the resource configured by the network device for the first UE, or, when the fourth time unit is before the second time unit, the second time unit may also be the resource configured by the first UE based on the fourth time unit. The resources reserved by the PSCCH in the cell are selected for resource selection.
其中,第三参考信号,可以参见第一参考信号的介绍,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the third reference signal, reference may be made to the introduction of the first reference signal, which will not be repeated here.
S707、当第三参考信号的接收信号强度大于第五阈值时,第一UE在第四时间单元检测PSCCH。S707. When the received signal strength of the third reference signal is greater than the fifth threshold, the first UE detects the PSCCH in a fourth time unit.
其中,第五阈值可以是预配置的,或者,第五阈值是通信组配置的,或者,第五阈值是网络设备配置的。示例性的,第五阈值包括RSRP阈值。Wherein, the fifth threshold may be pre-configured, or the fifth threshold is configured by the communication group, or the fifth threshold is configured by the network device. Exemplarily, the fifth threshold includes an RSRP threshold.
示例性的,在第四时间单元中,PSCCH位于第三参考信号之后,当第一UE检测到第三参考信号的接收信号强度大于第五阈值时,第一UE在同一时间单元中,继续接收并检测PSCCH。Exemplarily, in the fourth time unit, the PSCCH is located after the third reference signal, and when the first UE detects that the received signal strength of the third reference signal is greater than the fifth threshold, the first UE continues to receive in the same time unit And detect PSCCH.
示例性的,通过情况1和情况2,对第一UE在第四时间单元检测PSCCH进行介绍:Exemplarily, through case 1 and case 2, the first UE detects the PSCCH in the fourth time unit:
情况1,当第三参考信号占用全带宽中的所有子信道时,第一UE在第四时间单元的所有子信道上检测PSCCH。In case 1, when the third reference signal occupies all subchannels in the full bandwidth, the first UE detects the PSCCH on all subchannels in the fourth time unit.
也就是说,对于第一UE来说,若第一UE在第四时间单元上接收到第三参考信号,则意味着,在第四时间单元之内,第三参考信号之后存在信息传输。在第三UE通过PSCCH传输信息时,第一UE即可在第四时间单元的所有子信道上检测PSCCH,相比于在所有时间单元的所有子信道上盲检测PSCCH而言,第一UE在时域上的盲检范围缩小,有助于降低PSCCH的盲检功耗。That is to say, for the first UE, if the first UE receives the third reference signal in the fourth time unit, it means that within the fourth time unit, there is information transmission after the third reference signal. When the third UE transmits information through the PSCCH, the first UE can detect the PSCCH on all sub-channels of the fourth time unit. The blind detection range in the time domain is reduced, which helps to reduce the blind detection power consumption of the PSCCH.
情况2、当第三参考信号占用全带宽中的第一子信道时,第一UE在第四时间单元的第一子信道上检测PSCCH。Case 2: When the third reference signal occupies the first subchannel in the full bandwidth, the first UE detects the PSCCH on the first subchannel in the fourth time unit.
也就是说,对于第一UE来说,若第一UE在第四时间单元的第一子信道上接收到第三参考信号,则意味着,在第四时间单元之内,第三参考信号之后存在信息传输。在第三UE在第一子信道上通过PSCCH传输信息时,第一UE即可在第四时间单元的第一子信道上检测PSCCH,相比于在所有时间单元的所有子信道上盲检测PSCCH而言,第一UE在时域和频 域上的盲检范围缩小,有助于降低PSCCH的盲检功耗。That is to say, for the first UE, if the first UE receives the third reference signal on the first subchannel of the fourth time unit, it means that within the fourth time unit, after the third reference signal There is information transfer. When the third UE transmits information through the PSCCH on the first sub-channel, the first UE can detect the PSCCH on the first sub-channel in the fourth time unit, compared to blindly detecting the PSCCH on all sub-channels in all time units In other words, the blind detection range of the first UE in the time domain and the frequency domain is reduced, which helps to reduce the blind detection power consumption of the PSCCH.
对于第一UE来说,在检测PSCCH之后,当PSCCH所承载的信息包括第一级SCI时,第一UE基于第一级SCI,进行资源感知,以确定预约资源,详见图4的介绍,此处不再赘述。当PSCCH所承载的信息包括PSSCH的资源位置信息时,第一UE基于PSSCH的资源位置信息,接收PSSCH所承载的信息,以实现数据信息的接收,详见相关技术的介绍,此处不再赘述。For the first UE, after detecting the PSCCH, when the information carried by the PSCCH includes the first-level SCI, the first UE performs resource sensing based on the first-level SCI to determine reserved resources. See the introduction in Figure 4 for details. I won't repeat them here. When the information carried by the PSCCH includes the resource location information of the PSSCH, the first UE receives the information carried by the PSSCH based on the resource location information of the PSSCH, so as to realize the reception of data information. For details, refer to the introduction of related technologies, and will not repeat them here .
在一些实施例中,如图15a所示,第一UE执行S703之后,若能够在第二时间单元上进行信号传输,则第一UE还执行S710:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 15a, after the first UE performs S703, if signal transmission can be performed in the second time unit, the first UE further performs S710:
S710、第一UE在第三资源上发送第四参考信号。S710. The first UE sends a fourth reference signal on the third resource.
其中,第三资源在S702的至少一个子时间单元之后,且在第二时间单元之前,第四参考信号用于指示第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。Wherein, the third resource is after at least one sub-time unit of S702 and before the second time unit, and the fourth reference signal is used to instruct the first UE to perform transmission in the second time unit.
示例性的,以图15b为例,第一UE所执行的LBT过程包括LBT4。对应的,LBT过程的结束时刻与LBT过程所在时隙的下一个时隙起始位置存在时间偏移。第三资源可以是第一个时隙中GAP符号之前的一个符号。Exemplarily, taking Fig. 15b as an example, the LBT process performed by the first UE includes LBT4. Correspondingly, there is a time offset between the end moment of the LBT process and the start position of the next time slot of the time slot where the LBT process is located. The third resource may be one symbol preceding the GAP symbol in the first slot.
应理解,若LBT过程的结束时刻与该LBT过程所在时隙的下一个时隙起始时刻存在偏移,第一UE可以发送第四参考信号,以提前占据信道,避免异***的通信设备抢占第二时间单元,也能够使得同***的其他UE测量同***的接收信号强度,避免同***的其他UE抢占第二时间单元,或者使得同***UE能够区分同***干扰和异***干扰。It should be understood that if there is an offset between the end time of the LBT process and the start time of the next time slot of the time slot where the LBT process is located, the first UE may send the fourth reference signal to occupy the channel in advance to avoid preemption by communication devices of different systems The second time unit can also enable other UEs of the same system to measure the received signal strength of the same system, so as to prevent other UEs of the same system from preempting the second time unit, or enable UEs of the same system to distinguish between same-system interference and different-system interference.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,指示信息(如上述第一指示信息,或第二指示信息)可以承载于SCI中,以通过PSCCH发送。或者,指示信息(如上述第一指示信息,或第二指示信息)可以承载于第一级SCI中,以通过PSCCH发送。或者,指示信息(如上述第一指示信息,或第二指示信息)可以承载于第二级SCI中,以通过PSSCH发送。或者,指示信息(如上述第一指示信息,或第二指示信息)可以承载于媒体接入控制层控制元素(media access control-control element,MAC CE)中,以通过媒体接入控制层(media access control,MAC)层信令发送。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, indication information (such as the above-mentioned first indication information or second indication information) may be carried in the SCI to be sent through the PSCCH. Alternatively, the indication information (such as the above first indication information or the second indication information) may be carried in the first-level SCI to be sent through the PSCCH. Alternatively, the indication information (such as the first indication information or the second indication information) may be carried in the second-level SCI to be sent through the PSSCH. Alternatively, the indication information (such as the above-mentioned first indication information, or the second indication information) may be carried in a media access control layer control element (media access control-control element, MAC CE), so as to pass the media access control layer (media access control, MAC) layer signaling.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,以Type1信道接入过程为例,S702中的至少一个子时间单元,包括第一UE进入随机回退状态之后感知的子时间单元,或者,第一UE在推迟时间之外需要感知的子时间单元数量。应理解,第一UE在推迟时间内,仍需要感知一定数量的空闲子时间单元。当推迟时间内的子时间单元满足S703中第一子时间单元的特征时,如第二UE发送信号的子时间单元,此类子时间单元忙闲状态的确定,可以参见公式(2)。当推迟时间内的子时间单元满足S703中第二子时间单元的特征时,如第二UE未发送信号的子时间单元,此类子时间单元忙闲状态的确定,可以参见公式(3)。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, taking the Type1 channel access procedure as an example, at least one sub-time unit in S702 includes the sub-time unit perceived after the first UE enters the random back-off state, or the first UE The number of sub-time units that the UE needs to perceive outside the deferment time. It should be understood that the first UE still needs to perceive a certain number of idle sub-time units within the delay time. When the sub-time unit within the delay time satisfies the characteristics of the first sub-time unit in S703, such as the sub-time unit in which the second UE sends a signal, the determination of the busy state of such sub-time unit can refer to formula (2). When the sub-time unit within the delay time satisfies the characteristics of the second sub-time unit in S703, such as the sub-time unit where the second UE does not send a signal, the determination of the busy state of such sub-time unit can refer to formula (3).
以上,以第一时间单元中发送第一参考信号的第二UE数量是一个为例,对侧行链路信道接入方法进行介绍。应理解,第一时间单元中发送第一参考信号的第二UE数量也可以是至少两个。例如,以图8b为例,两个UE(即UE1和UE2)以频分复用的方式占用传输资源。第一时间单元包括第一个时隙,第二时间单元包括第二个时隙。第一UE是图8b中的UE3,第二UE是图8b中的UE1和UE2。UE1和UE2以频分复用的方式占用第一时间单元。此种情况下,第二UE的数量是两个。In the above, taking the number of the second UE sending the first reference signal in the first time unit as an example, the sidelink channel access method is introduced. It should be understood that the number of the second UEs that send the first reference signal in the first time unit may also be at least two. For example, taking FIG. 8b as an example, two UEs (ie, UE1 and UE2) occupy transmission resources in a frequency division multiplexing manner. The first time unit includes a first time slot, and the second time unit includes a second time slot. The first UE is UE3 in Fig. 8b, and the second UE is UE1 and UE2 in Fig. 8b. UE1 and UE2 occupy the first time unit in a frequency division multiplexing manner. In this case, the number of second UEs is two.
在第二UE数量是至少两个的情况下,至少两个第二UE中每个第二UE在第一时间单元 上发送第一参考信号。相应的,第一UE在第一时间单元上接收来自至少两个第二UE中每个第二UE的第一参考信号。相应的,对于第一UE来说,第一UE所确定的第一参考信号的接收信号强度,是指,至少两个第二UE中每个第二UE的参考信号的接收信号强度之和。应理解,对于第一UE来说,若第一UE执行LBT的子时间单元包括第一子时间单元,则第一子时间单元的接收信号强度,既包括了异***中通信设备对自身的干扰,又包括了同***其他UE对自身的干扰。此种情况下,同***其他UE对自身的干扰,是基于至少两个第二UE中每个第二UE的第一参考信号确定的。第一子时间单元的忙闲状态确定仍可以参见公式(2)的介绍。若第一UE执行LBT的子时间单元包括第二子时间单元,第二子时间单元的忙闲状态确定仍可以参见公式(3)的介绍。When the number of second UEs is at least two, each of the at least two second UEs sends the first reference signal in the first time unit. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the first reference signal from each of the at least two second UEs in the first time unit. Correspondingly, for the first UE, the received signal strength of the first reference signal determined by the first UE refers to the sum of the received signal strengths of the reference signals of each of the at least two second UEs. It should be understood that, for the first UE, if the sub-time unit in which the first UE performs LBT includes the first sub-time unit, the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit includes the interference of the communication device in the different system to itself , including interference from other UEs in the same system. In this case, the self-interference of other UEs in the same system is determined based on the first reference signal of each second UE in the at least two second UEs. The determination of the busy/idle status of the first sub-time unit can still refer to the introduction of formula (2). If the sub-time unit in which the first UE performs LBT includes the second sub-time unit, the determination of the busy/idle status of the second sub-time unit can still refer to the introduction of formula (3).
应理解,图8b仅以频分复用的方式为例,进行介绍,不应理解为对本申请实施例的限定。至少两个第二UE还可以空分复用的方式占用相同的传输资源。It should be understood that FIG. 8b only uses frequency division multiplexing as an example for introduction, and should not be construed as a limitation to this embodiment of the present application. At least two second UEs may also occupy the same transmission resource in a space division multiplexing manner.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请实施例还提供了通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网元,或者包含上述网元的装置,或者为可用于网元的部件。可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. Correspondingly, the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, and the communication device may be the network element in the foregoing method embodiment, or a device including the foregoing network element, or may be a component applicable to the network element. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above functions, the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
示例性的,图16示出了一种通信装置1600的结构示意图。该通信装置1600包括处理单元1601、发送单元1602和接收单元1603。Exemplarily, FIG. 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1600 . The communication device 1600 includes a processing unit 1601 , a sending unit 1602 and a receiving unit 1603 .
一种可能的示例中,以通信装置1600为第一UE为例,处理单元1601用于支持第一UE执行图7中的S702、S703,和/或本申请实施例中第一UE需要执行的其他处理操作。发送单元1602用于支持本申请实施例中第一UE需要执行的其他发送操作。接收单元1603用于支持第一UE执行图7中的S702,和/或本申请实施例中第一UE需要执行的其他接收操作。In a possible example, taking the communication device 1600 as the first UE as an example, the processing unit 1601 is configured to support the first UE to perform S702 and S703 in FIG. Other processing operations. The sending unit 1602 is configured to support other sending operations that need to be performed by the first UE in this embodiment of the application. The receiving unit 1603 is configured to support the first UE to perform S702 in FIG. 7 and/or other receiving operations that need to be performed by the first UE in this embodiment of the present application.
再一种可能的示例中,以通信装置1600为第二UE为例,处理单元1601用于支持本申请实施例中第二UE需要执行的其他处理操作。发送单元1602用于支持第二UE执行图7中的S701,和/或本申请实施例中第二UE需要执行的其他发送操作。接收单元1603用于支持本申请实施例中第二UE需要执行的其他接收操作。In another possible example, taking the communications apparatus 1600 as an example of the second UE, the processing unit 1601 is configured to support other processing operations that need to be performed by the second UE in this embodiment of the present application. The sending unit 1602 is configured to support the second UE to perform S701 in FIG. 7 , and/or other sending operations that the second UE needs to perform in this embodiment of the application. The receiving unit 1603 is configured to support other receiving operations that need to be performed by the second UE in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,该通信装置1600还可以包括存储单元1604,用于存储通信装置的程序代码和数据,数据可以包括不限于原始数据或者中间数据等。Optionally, the communication device 1600 may further include a storage unit 1604 for storing program codes and data of the communication device, and the data may include but not limited to original data or intermediate data.
其中,处理单元1601可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是CPU,通用处理器,专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。Wherein, the processing unit 1601 may be a processor or a controller, such as a CPU, a general-purpose processor, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure. The processor can also be a combination of computing functions, for example, a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
发送单元1602可以是通信接口、发送器或发送电路等,其中,该通信接口是统称,在具体实现中,该通信接口可以包括多个接口。The sending unit 1602 may be a communication interface, a transmitter, or a sending circuit, etc., where the communication interface is collectively referred to, and in specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces.
接收单元1603可以是通信接口、接收器或接收电路等,其中,该通信接口是统称,在具体实现中,该通信接口可以包括多个接口。The receiving unit 1603 may be a communication interface, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc., where the communication interface is collectively referred to, and in specific implementation, the communication interface may include multiple interfaces.
发送单元1602和接收单元1603可以是物理上或者逻辑上实现为同一个单元。The sending unit 1602 and the receiving unit 1603 may be physically or logically implemented as the same unit.
存储单元1604可以是存储器。The storage unit 1604 may be a memory.
当处理单元1601为处理器,发送单元1602和接收单元1603为通信接口,存储单元1604为存储器时,本申请实施例所涉及的通信装置可以为图17所示。When the processing unit 1601 is a processor, the sending unit 1602 and the receiving unit 1603 are communication interfaces, and the storage unit 1604 is a memory, the communication device involved in this embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 17 .
参阅图17所示,该通信装置1700包括:处理器1701、通信接口1702、存储器1703。可选的,通信装置还可以包括总线1704。其中,通信接口1702、处理器1701以及存储器1703可以通过总线1704相互连接;总线1704可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线1704可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图17中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Referring to FIG. 17 , the communication device 1700 includes: a processor 1701 , a communication interface 1702 , and a memory 1703 . Optionally, the communication device may further include a bus 1704 . Wherein, the communication interface 1702, the processor 1701 and the memory 1703 can be connected to each other through the bus 1704; the bus 1704 can be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus etc. The bus 1704 can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 17 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
可选的,本申请实施例还提供一种携带计算机指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述实施例所介绍的方法。Optionally, the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product carrying computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method described in the foregoing embodiments.
可选的,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储计算机指令,当该计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述实施例所介绍的方法。Optionally, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the method described in the above-mentioned embodiments.
可选的,本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括:处理电路和收发电路,处理电路和收发电路用于实现上述实施例所介绍的方法。其中,处理电路用于执行相应方法中的处理动作,收发电路用于执行相应方法中的接收/发送的动作。Optionally, an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including: a processing circuit and a transceiver circuit, and the processing circuit and the transceiver circuit are used to implement the methods described in the foregoing embodiments. Wherein, the processing circuit is used to execute the processing action in the corresponding method, and the transceiver circuit is used to execute the receiving/sending action in the corresponding method.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包括一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device including a server, a data center, and the like integrated with one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state drive (solid state drive, SSD)) wait.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的***,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个模块或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或模块的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple modules or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or modules may be in electrical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个设备上。 可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple devices. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到本申请可借助软件加必需的通用硬件的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在可读取的存储介质中,如计算机的软盘,硬盘或光盘等,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。Through the above description of the implementation, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the present application can be implemented by means of software plus necessary general-purpose hardware, of course, it can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is a better implementation . Based on this understanding, the essence of the technical solution of this application or the part that contributes can be embodied in the form of software products, and the computer software products are stored in readable storage media, such as computer floppy disks, hard disks or optical disks etc., including several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited thereto, and changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application should be covered within the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (22)

  1. 一种侧行链路信道接入方法,其特征在于,应用于非授权频谱通信,所述方法包括:A sidelink channel access method, characterized in that it is applied to unlicensed spectrum communications, the method comprising:
    第一用户设备UE在第一时间单元上接收来自第二UE的第一参考信号;The first user equipment UE receives the first reference signal from the second UE on the first time unit;
    所述第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度;The first UE detects received signal strength on at least one sub-time unit;
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输。The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE performs transmission in a second time unit.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE在至少一个子时间单元上检测接收信号强度,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first UE detects the received signal strength in at least one sub-time unit, comprising:
    所述第一UE在第一子时间单元上检测所述接收信号强度,所述至少一个子时间单元包括所述第一子时间单元,所述第一子时间单元为所述第二UE在所述第一时间单元上发送信号的子时间单元;The first UE detects the received signal strength on a first sub-time unit, the at least one sub-time unit includes the first sub-time unit, and the first sub-time unit is the second UE in the first sub-time unit A sub-time unit for sending a signal on the first time unit;
    和/或,and / or,
    所述第一UE在第二子时间单元上检测所述接收信号强度,所述至少一个子时间单元包括所述第二子时间单元,所述第二子时间单元为所述第二UE未发送信号的子时间单元。The first UE detects the received signal strength on a second sub-time unit, the at least one sub-time unit includes the second sub-time unit, and the second sub-time unit is that the second UE does not send The sub-time unit of the signal.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE Two time units are transmitted, including:
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态;The first UE determines the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit;
    当所述至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N1时,所述第一UE在所述第二时间单元进行传输,其中,所述N1为所述第一UE随机生成的正整数。When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N1, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N1 is the first UE randomly Generated positive integer.
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE Two time units are transmitted, including:
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态;The first UE determines the busy state of each sub-time unit in the at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit;
    当所述至少一个子时间单元中处于空闲状态的子时间单元数量大于或等于N2时,所述第一UE在所述第二时间单元进行传输,其中,所述N2为预定义的正整数。When the number of sub-time units in the idle state in the at least one sub-time unit is greater than or equal to N2, the first UE transmits in the second time unit, where N2 is a predefined positive integer.
  5. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first UE determines the at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit The busy status of each sub-time unit in the time unit, including:
    当第一强度小于第一阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第一子时间单元为空闲状态;When the first intensity is less than a first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in an idle state;
    当所述第一强度大于或等于所述第一阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第一子时间单元为繁忙状态;When the first intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the first sub-time unit is in a busy state;
    其中,所述第一强度为所述第一子时间单元的所述接收信号强度与所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度之间的差值。Wherein, the first strength is a difference between the received signal strength of the first sub-time unit and the received signal strength of the first reference signal.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述至少一个子时间单元中每 个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the first UE determines the at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit The busy status of each sub-time unit in , including:
    当第二强度小于所述第一阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第二子时间单元为空闲状态;When the second intensity is less than the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state;
    当所述第二强度大于或等于所述第一阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第二子时间单元为繁忙状态;When the second intensity is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state;
    其中,所述至少一个子时间单元还包括所述第二子时间单元,所述第二强度为所述第二子时间单元的所述接收信号强度。Wherein, the at least one sub-time unit further includes the second sub-time unit, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  7. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述至少一个子时间单元中每个子时间单元的忙闲状态,包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first UE determines the at least one sub-time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit The busy status of each sub-time unit in , including:
    当第二强度小于第六阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第二子时间单元为空闲状态;When the second intensity is less than the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in an idle state;
    当所述第二强度大于或等于所述第六阈值时,所述第一UE确定所述第二子时间单元为繁忙状态;When the second intensity is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold, the first UE determines that the second sub-time unit is in a busy state;
    其中,所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度大于第二阈值,所述第二强度为所述第二子时间单元的所述接收信号强度。Wherein, the received signal strength of the first reference signal is greater than a second threshold, and the second strength is the received signal strength of the second sub-time unit.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that,
    所述第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路控制信道解调参考信号PSCCH DMRS;或者,The first reference signal includes a physical sidelink control channel demodulation reference signal PSCCH DMRS; or,
    所述第一参考信号包括物理侧行链路共享信道解调参考信号PSSCH DMRS。The first reference signal includes a physical sidelink shared channel demodulation reference signal PSSCH DMRS.
  9. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that,
    所述第一参考信号包括预配置的序列;或者,The first reference signal includes a preconfigured sequence; or,
    所述第一参考信号包括通信组配置的序列;或者,The first reference signal includes a sequence of communication group configurations; or,
    所述第一参考信号包括网络设备配置的序列。The first reference signal includes a sequence of network device configurations.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 9, characterized in that,
    所述第一参考信号位于所述第一时间单元的第一个符号之后。The first reference signal is located after the first symbol of the first time unit.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    所述第一UE在所述第一时间单元上接收来自所述第二UE的第二参考信号,其中,所述第二参考信号与所述第一参考信号相同,所述第二参考信号位于所述第一时间单元的所述第一个符号上;The first UE receives a second reference signal from the second UE at the first time unit, where the second reference signal is the same as the first reference signal, and the second reference signal is located at on said first symbol of said first time unit;
    所述第一UE根据所述第二参考信号进行自动增益控制AGC。The first UE performs automatic gain control (AGC) according to the second reference signal.
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 9, characterized in that,
    所述第一参考信号位于所述第一时间单元的第一个符号。The first reference signal is located in the first symbol of the first time unit.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时间单元的所述第一个符号承载所述第一参考信号的序列;The method according to claim 12, wherein the first symbol of the first time unit carries the sequence of the first reference signal;
    其中,所述第一参考信号的第一部分序列用于所述第一UE确定所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度,所述第一参考信号的第二部分序列用于所述第一UE进行AGC。Wherein, the first partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the first UE to determine the received signal strength of the first reference signal, and the second partial sequence of the first reference signal is used by the first UE to perform AGC.
  14. 根据权利要求1至13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the first UE determines the received signal strength according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit Before the first UE transmits in the second time unit, the method further includes:
    所述第一UE确定参考信号接收信号强度大于第三阈值的时间单元数量;The first UE determines the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than a third threshold;
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收 信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE transmits in a second time unit, including:
    当所述参考信号接收信号强度大于所述第三阈值的时间单元数量小于第四阈值时,所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定在第二时间单元进行传输。When the number of time units for which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold is less than the fourth threshold, the first UE, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the reception of the at least one sub-time unit Signal strength to determine transmission in the second time unit.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 14, characterized in that,
    所述参考信号接收信号强度大于所述第三阈值的时间单元在时域上是连续的。The time units in which the received signal strength of the reference signal is greater than the third threshold are continuous in the time domain.
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 14 or 15, characterized in that,
    所述第四阈值是预配置的;或者,said fourth threshold is preconfigured; or,
    所述第四阈值是通信组配置的;或者,The fourth threshold is configured by the communication group; or,
    所述第四阈值是网络设备配置的;或者,The fourth threshold is configured by the network device; or,
    所述第四阈值是基于所述第二UE的最大信道占用时间COT确定的,其中,所述第二UE的最大COT与所述第二UE发送的所述第一参考信号相关联。The fourth threshold is determined based on the maximum channel occupation time COT of the second UE, where the maximum COT of the second UE is associated with the first reference signal sent by the second UE.
  17. 根据权利要求1至13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, further comprising:
    所述第一UE接收来自所述第二UE的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第二UE的最大COT和剩余COT中的至少一项;The first UE receives first indication information from the second UE, where the first indication information indicates at least one of a maximum COT and a remaining COT of the second UE;
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,包括:The first UE determines, according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal and the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, that the first UE transmits in a second time unit, including:
    所述第一UE根据所述第一参考信号的接收信号强度和所述至少一个子时间单元的接收信号强度,以及所述第一指示信息,确定所述第一UE在第二时间单元进行传输,其中,所述第二时间单元属于所述第二UE的剩余COT中的一个时间单元。determining, by the first UE, that the first UE transmits in a second time unit according to the received signal strength of the first reference signal, the received signal strength of the at least one sub-time unit, and the first indication information , wherein the second time unit belongs to a time unit in the remaining COT of the second UE.
  18. 根据权利要求1至17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 17, further comprising:
    所述第一UE接收来自所述第二UE的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述第一UE在所述第二时间单元前的信道接入类型,或者,所述第二指示信息指示所述第一UE共享所述第二UE的COT。The first UE receives second indication information from the second UE, where the second indication information indicates the channel access type of the first UE before the second time unit, or, the The second indication information indicates that the first UE shares the COT of the second UE.
  19. 根据权利要求1至18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 18, further comprising:
    所述第一UE在第三资源上发送第三参考信号,其中,所述第三资源在所述至少一个子时间单元之后,且在所述第二时间单元之前,所述第三参考信号用于指示所述第一UE在所述第二时间单元进行传输。The first UE sends a third reference signal on a third resource, where the third resource is after the at least one sub-time unit and before the second time unit, and the third reference signal is used by Instructing the first UE to transmit in the second time unit.
  20. 一种用户设备,其特征在于,包括:处理器和存储器,所述处理器和所述存储器耦合,所述存储器存储有程序指令,当所述存储器存储的程序指令被所述处理器执行时,如权利要求1至19中的任一项所述的方法被实现。A user equipment, characterized by comprising: a processor and a memory, the processor is coupled to the memory, the memory stores program instructions, and when the program instructions stored in the memory are executed by the processor, A method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 19 is carried out.
  21. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器和输入输出接口,所述输入输出接口用于接收来自所述芯片之外的其它装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述芯片之外的其它装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1至19中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that it includes a processor and an input-output interface, the input-output interface is used to receive signals from other devices other than the chip and transmit them to the processor or transfer signals from the processor The signal is sent to other devices other than the chip, and the processor implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 19 through a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
  22. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,实现如权利要求1至19中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein a computer program or instruction is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 19 is realized .
PCT/CN2022/140463 2022-02-18 2022-12-20 Sidelink channel access method and communication apparatus WO2023155586A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210150296.X 2022-02-18
CN202210150296 2022-02-18
CN202210339478.1A CN116684967A (en) 2022-02-18 2022-04-01 Side uplink channel access method and communication device
CN202210339478.1 2022-04-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023155586A1 true WO2023155586A1 (en) 2023-08-24

Family

ID=87577448

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/140463 WO2023155586A1 (en) 2022-02-18 2022-12-20 Sidelink channel access method and communication apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023155586A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110547036A (en) * 2019-07-26 2019-12-06 北京小米移动软件有限公司 method and device for determining contention window, communication equipment and storage medium
CN111770509A (en) * 2019-03-30 2020-10-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
US20210297170A1 (en) * 2018-07-20 2021-09-23 Zte Corporation Interference finding method and apparatus, receiving device, and transmitting device
WO2021262896A1 (en) * 2020-06-24 2021-12-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Channel occupancy time sharing based on received signal strength

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210297170A1 (en) * 2018-07-20 2021-09-23 Zte Corporation Interference finding method and apparatus, receiving device, and transmitting device
CN111770509A (en) * 2019-03-30 2020-10-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN110547036A (en) * 2019-07-26 2019-12-06 北京小米移动软件有限公司 method and device for determining contention window, communication equipment and storage medium
WO2021262896A1 (en) * 2020-06-24 2021-12-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Channel occupancy time sharing based on received signal strength

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SONY: "Considerations on channel access for NR unlicensed operations", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1808335 CHANNEL ACCESS FOR NR UNLICENSED OPERATIONS, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Gothenburg, Sweden; 20180820 - 20180824, 11 August 2018 (2018-08-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051515717 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3818768B1 (en) Method and user equipment for performing random access channel procedure for unlicensed operation
US10292182B2 (en) Listen before talk channel access procedure for uplink LAA
WO2017140249A1 (en) Listen before talk channel access procedure for uplink laa
US9432818B2 (en) Controlling communication devices
US10051661B2 (en) Method and apparatus for communicating using unlicensed bands in mobile communication system
KR102087656B1 (en) Method and apparatus for distributed scheduling of resources in a device to divice communication system
EP3681221A1 (en) Method and device for configuring cell in wireless communication system
US10230503B2 (en) Methods and devices for determining or acquiring radio resources
WO2015081718A1 (en) Communication processing method and apparatus for wireless network
CN115589596A (en) Method and device for sidelight communication
CN106031268A (en) Communication method, base station, and user equipment
KR20190105668A (en) Radio communication system and radio communication method
US11134521B2 (en) System and method for UE random access over wide bandwidth with subset restriction
KR20200048636A (en) Apparatus and method for uplink transmission in wireless communication system
US11510241B2 (en) Network-assisted clear channel assessment bandwidth adaptation mechanism
WO2019051654A1 (en) Method and device for determining resource of logical channel, and computer storage medium
CN105284175B (en) Method and device for establishing direct link in wireless local area network
WO2023155586A1 (en) Sidelink channel access method and communication apparatus
WO2022141582A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2017166249A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
CN114026940A (en) Method, terminal device and network node for uplink transmission
CN116684967A (en) Side uplink channel access method and communication device
WO2023151391A1 (en) Beam training method and communication apparatus
US11997699B2 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus
US20220400514A1 (en) Controlling transmission medium access in an open spectrum

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22926885

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1